WO2025241978A1 - Communication method and related apparatus - Google Patents
Communication method and related apparatusInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025241978A1 WO2025241978A1 PCT/CN2025/095061 CN2025095061W WO2025241978A1 WO 2025241978 A1 WO2025241978 A1 WO 2025241978A1 CN 2025095061 W CN2025095061 W CN 2025095061W WO 2025241978 A1 WO2025241978 A1 WO 2025241978A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- rss
- network device
- beam failure
- terminal device
- duration
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
- H04W16/24—Cell structures
- H04W16/28—Cell structures using beam steering
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related apparatus.
- Wireless communication can be a transmission communication between two or more communication nodes that does not propagate through conductors or cables.
- These communication nodes typically include network devices and terminal devices.
- Traditional network devices can be fixed to a location on the ground, such as the terrestrial base station belonging to a terrestrial network (TN) cell.
- the beam management process of a TN cell (e.g., determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, and selecting a target beam from multiple candidate beams) is based on the signal reception strength of the signal received by the terminal device from the network device.
- network equipment may not be fixed in a certain place on the ground.
- the network equipment may be a high-speed mobile device belonging to a non-terrestrial network (NTN) cell, including but not limited to satellite equipment such as low-Earth orbit satellites, medium-Earth orbit satellites, and high-Earth orbit satellites.
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- the satellite equipment to which NTN cells belong may move at high speeds.
- the reference signal reception strength of an NTN cell is strong, but this does not mean that the reference signal reception strength of the NTN cell will remain strong at one or more subsequent moments. This makes the beam management process of TN cells no longer applicable.
- This application provides a communication method and related equipment for improving beam management efficiency.
- This application provides a communication method applicable to a terminal device, for example, executed by the terminal device, or executed by a component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) in the terminal device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the terminal device's functions.
- a component e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system
- this application uses a first terminal device as an example.
- the first terminal device acquires first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; based on the first visibility information, the first terminal device determines the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to a first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- RS reference signal
- the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device.
- This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself.
- the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure detection, and this remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device, and this remaining service duration can be used for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level, which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal obstruction of the network device, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- the network device corresponding to an RS can be understood as the network device that provides or transmits the RS.
- the resources of the RS can be configured by the network device itself or by other network devices; this is not limited here.
- region-level visibility information refers to the visibility information configured for each region in one or more regions
- terminal device-level visibility information refers to the visibility information configured for each terminal device in one or more terminal devices.
- visibility information indicates the degree of obstruction in the transmission path of signals between network devices and terminal devices, and this obstruction reflects the communication quality.
- the communication device can use visibility information to determine (or select) one or more network devices with higher communication quality for communication with the terminal device, thereby improving communication efficiency. This can be achieved, for example, through one or more of the following examples.
- terminal devices can select network devices that are not blocked (or have only minor blockage) based on signal obstruction, which can reduce unnecessary switching and reselection and improve communication efficiency.
- terminal devices or network devices can predict the timing of signal interruptions based on signal obstruction and prepare/switch to network devices with higher communication quality in advance to improve communication efficiency.
- terminal devices can communicate with network devices of higher quality at reasonable locations and/or in appropriate postures based on signal obstruction, which can improve the success rate of signal transmission and thus enhance communication efficiency.
- terminal devices can select unobstructed (or less obstructed) network devices for positioning based on signal obstruction, which can improve positioning accuracy and enable related communication services through higher positioning accuracy, thereby improving communication efficiency.
- visibility information can be replaced with other terms, such as visibility information of NTN communication, occlusion information, occlusion information of NTN communication, NTN transmission environment information, long-term link quality information, or NTN transmission path information, etc.
- the visibility information includes any of the following:
- Information 1 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a visible path
- Information 3 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a line-of-sight (LOS) path;
- NLOS non-line of sight
- the order of the four communication qualities indicated by the above four indications from high to low can be: communication quality indicated by information 1 (or communication quality indicated by information 2), communication quality indicated by information 3, and communication quality indicated by information 4.
- the communication quality indicated by the visibility information can be the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality. That is, the visibility information is used to indicate the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality between network devices located within that spatial angular range and terminal devices located within that geographical area.
- the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information in various ways.
- the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information based on instructions from other devices (such as terminal devices, network devices, etc.), which can reduce implementation complexity.
- the first terminal device can determine the first visibility information through information obtained by its own information acquisition module (such as a camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.).
- visibility information may carry an identifier of a region or an identifier of a terminal device.
- the first visibility information may include an identifier of the first geographical region; in this case, the visibility information can be understood as region-level visibility information.
- the first visibility information may include an identifier of the first terminal device; in this case, the visibility information can be understood as terminal device-level visibility information.
- the remaining service duration of a network device providing services to a terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the current time and the time when the network device stops providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the start time and the end time of the network device providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the end time and the latest time when the measurement was started.
- the termination time of the network device's service to the terminal device can also be understood as the cutoff time of the network device's service to the terminal device, that is, the network device will stop (or suspend) the service provided to the terminal device at the cutoff time.
- the remaining service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as remaining serviceable duration, remaining available duration, remaining communication duration, or remaining communication duration.
- the first terminal device can determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. It can be understood that the visibility information can be used to determine the remaining service duration.
- first visibility information can be used to select/determine a first time period, wherein the first time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods indicated by the visibility information with communication quality better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a second time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods indicated by the visibility information with poor communication quality). Furthermore, within this first time period, the total duration of time periods satisfying one or more of the following conditions, starting from the current time, can be the remaining service duration:
- Condition 1 The duration during which the expected elevation angle is greater than the elevation angle threshold
- Condition 2 The duration for which the expected signal reception strength is greater than the threshold
- the expected channel transmission loss (which can be determined based on parameters such as the relative position, distance, and frequency between the terminal device and the network device) is less than the threshold for a certain duration.
- the parameters involved in conditions 1 to 3 above can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the network device.
- the network device can provide services (or provide better services) to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the remaining service duration for the network device to provide services to the terminal device can be determined based on one or more of the above conditions.
- the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. This can be understood as: the remaining service duration is used for preemptive recovery before beam failure; or, it can be understood as: the remaining service duration can be used to determine whether the current beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the first RS) is about to fail; or, the remaining service duration can be a period of time before the network device terminates its service to the terminal device.
- the remaining service duration for beam failure recovery can be replaced by: the remaining service duration being used for beam failure determination, determining whether a beam is about to fail, triggering beam failure recovery, or determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, etc.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second configuration information, the second configuration information being used to configure the first RS.
- the first terminal device can receive the first RS for beam failure detection based on the configuration of the network device, so that the terminal device can realize the beam failure detection process based on the configuration of the network device.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving indication information for indicating a first threshold; wherein the remaining service duration and the first threshold are used for beam failure recovery.
- the first terminal device can receive indication information for indicating the first threshold, so that the first terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on the remaining service time and the first threshold.
- the first threshold can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
- the method further includes: if the remaining service duration is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first terminal device sends a beam recovery request message.
- the first terminal device can determine that the beam corresponding to the first RS is about to fail or has already failed (or the service provided by the network device corresponding to the first RS to the first terminal device is about to fail or has already failed). To this end, the first terminal device can send a beam recovery request message to restore the communication beam.
- the beam recovery request information may include information sent by the terminal device during the beam failure recovery (BFR) process, such as a link recovery request (LRR), a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE) sending an indication of BFR, or a random access request.
- BFR beam failure recovery
- LRR link recovery request
- CE medium access control control element
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first configuration information, the first configuration information being used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection (CBD); wherein the beam recovery request information is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the second RS being an RS determined from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- first configuration information being used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer
- the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection (CBD)
- the beam recovery request information is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the second RS being an RS determined from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- the first terminal device can also receive first configuration information for configuring L RSs for candidate beam detection, and the first terminal device can determine a second RS from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, and improve beam management efficiency.
- the beam recovery request information is associated with the second RS, which can be understood as the second RS being used to determine the beam recovery request information.
- the terminal device can send the beam recovery request information based on the second RS.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs;
- the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
- the first condition can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
- the first indication information and the first configuration information may be carried in the same message/signaling, or the first indication information and the second configuration information described below may be carried in the same message/signaling.
- the service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information.
- the service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the start and end times during the process in which the first visibility information indicates that the network device is visible to the first terminal device (or the first visibility information indicates that the communication quality of the network device providing services to the first terminal device is better than a threshold).
- the first terminal device can determine the serviceable duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information.
- the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a third time period, wherein the third time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a fourth time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is poor).
- the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the serviceable duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
- service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as effective service time, effective service duration, effective communication duration, or effective communication duration.
- the cumulative overpass service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information.
- the cumulative overpass service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the total duration of one or more time periods (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous) included in the process of the network device being overpassed relative to the first terminal device, as indicated by the first visibility information.
- the first terminal device can determine the cumulative overpass service duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information.
- the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a fifth time period, wherein the fifth time period can include a fifth time period in which the network device is in the process of overpassing relative to the first terminal device, and the total duration of one or more time periods included in the fifth time period (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous).
- the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the cumulative overpass service duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
- the cumulative service duration over the top can be replaced with other terms, such as cumulative service time over the top, cumulative effective service duration over the top, cumulative communication duration over the top, or cumulative communicable duration over the top.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information, the second indication information indicating that the RS for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
- the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device;
- the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the expected signal strength can be determined based on the first visibility information.
- the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the first terminal device can be understood as the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the terminal device at a certain time in the future (or a certain time period), or the strength of the signal received by the terminal device at a certain time in the future.
- the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, that a network device and the first terminal device will be visible to each other at a future time (or a certain time period) (or, the communication quality indicated by the first visibility information is better than a threshold). Furthermore, the first terminal device can receive a first signal strength of the network device's signal at the current time (or a historical time), and correspondingly, the first terminal device can predict a second signal strength of the network device at the aforementioned future time (or a certain time period) based on the first signal strength, i.e., the second signal strength is the expected signal strength.
- the basis for the prediction may include the aforementioned first visibility information, the path loss change information between the network device and the first terminal device (e.g., determined by the relative position between the network device and the first terminal device), the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) information of the satellite where the network device is located, etc.
- EIRP equivalent isotropically radiated power
- the above signal strength can be the reference signal receiving power (RSRP).
- RSRP reference signal receiving power
- the signal strength mentioned above can be replaced with other parameters used to characterize signal reception quality, such as reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ).
- RSSQ reference signal receiving quality
- the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
- the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
- the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
- the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
- the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
- the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; different RSs within the same group of the K groups of RSs can be correlated, for example, the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
- the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
- the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
- the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
- a second aspect of this application provides a communication method applicable to a network device, for example, executed by the network device, or executed by a component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) of the network device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the functions of the network device.
- a component e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system
- this application uses a network device as an example.
- the network device determines a first RS (Signal Range), which is used for beam failure detection; wherein, first visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device, the first RS being the RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration being used for beam recovery before beam failure; wherein, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the network device transmits the first RS.
- first RS Signal Range
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device.
- the specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself.
- the first terminal device can determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide service to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. This remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device, which can be used for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level, avoiding or reducing the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal obstruction of the network device, thus improving beam management efficiency.
- the method further includes: the network device sending second configuration information for configuring the first RS.
- the first terminal device can receive the first RS for beam failure detection based on the configuration of the network device, so that the terminal device can realize the beam failure detection process based on the configuration of the network device.
- the method further includes: the network device sending indication information for indicating a first threshold; wherein the remaining service duration and the first threshold are used for beam failure recovery.
- the network device can send indication information to the first terminal device to indicate the first threshold, so that the first terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on the remaining service time and the first threshold.
- the method further includes: the network device sending first configuration information for configuring L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; wherein the beam recovery request information corresponding to the beam failure recovery is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam failure recovery; the second RS is an RS determined among the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- the network device can also send first configuration information for configuring L RSs for candidate beam detection to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device can determine a second RS from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of the network device, and improve beam management efficiency.
- the method further includes: the network device sending first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs;
- the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
- the method further includes: the network device sending second indication information indicating that the RS used for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
- the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device;
- the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the network device sending third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
- the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
- the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
- the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
- the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
- the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
- the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
- the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
- the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
- a third aspect of this application provides a communication method applicable to a terminal device, for example, executed by the terminal device, or executed by a component (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) in the terminal device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- a component e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system
- this application uses a first terminal device as an example.
- the first terminal device acquires first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the first terminal device receives first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; based on the first visibility information, the first terminal device determines a second RS from the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device.
- This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself.
- the first terminal device can determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs;
- the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information, the second indication information indicating that the RS for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
- the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device;
- the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
- the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
- the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
- the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
- the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
- the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
- the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
- the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
- the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
- a fourth aspect of this application provides a communication method applicable to a network device, for example, executed by the network device, or executed by a component (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) of the network device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the functions of the network device.
- a component e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system
- this application uses a network device as an example.
- the network device determines first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the network device transmits the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device.
- This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself.
- the first terminal device can determine a second RS from among these L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on the visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of the network device, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- the method further includes: the network device sending first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs;
- the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
- the method further includes: the network device sending second indication information indicating that the RS used for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
- the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device;
- the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the network device sending third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
- the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
- the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
- the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
- the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
- the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
- the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
- the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
- the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
- the fifth aspect of this application provides a communication device, which is a terminal device, or a component of a terminal device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- a communication device which is a terminal device, or a component of a terminal device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- the example of the communication device being executed by a terminal device will be used for illustration.
- the device includes a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to acquire first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the processing unit is further configured to determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to a first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the first aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the first aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects.
- the sixth aspect of this application provides a communication device that is a network device, or a component of a network device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of a network device.
- a communication device that is a network device, or a component of a network device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of a network device.
- the example of the communication device being a network device is described.
- the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit.
- the processing unit is used to determine a first RS (Real Signal), which is used for beam failure detection.
- First visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device.
- the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, where the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device.
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device.
- the transceiver unit is used to transmit the first RS.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the second aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects.
- the second aspect please refer to the second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
- the seventh aspect of this application provides a communication device, which is a terminal device, or a component of a terminal device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- a communication device which is a terminal device, or a component of a terminal device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit.
- the processing unit is configured to acquire first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device.
- the transceiver unit is configured to receive first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection.
- the processing unit is further configured to determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information, wherein the second RS is an RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the third aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects.
- the third aspect please refer to the third aspect, which will not be repeated here.
- the eighth aspect of this application provides a communication device that is a network device, or a component of a network device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of a network device.
- a communication device that is a network device, or a component of a network device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of a network device.
- the example of the communication device being a network device is described.
- the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit; the processing unit is used to determine first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the transceiver unit is used to transmit the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the fourth aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects.
- the fourth aspect please refer to the fourth aspect, which will not be repeated here.
- the ninth aspect of this application provides a communication device including at least one processor coupled to at least one memory; the at least one memory is used to store a program or instructions; the at least one processor is used to execute the program or instructions to enable the device to implement the method described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects.
- the tenth aspect of this application provides a communication device including at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface; the logic circuit is used to perform the method described in any of the possible implementations of the first to fourth aspects described above.
- the eleventh aspect of this application provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned terminal equipment and network equipment.
- the twelfth aspect of this application provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by a processor, perform the method as described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects described above.
- the thirteenth aspect of this application provides a computer program product (or computer program) that, when executed by a processor, performs the method described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects described above.
- the fourteenth aspect of this application provides a chip or chip system including at least one processor for supporting a communication device in implementing the method described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects.
- the chip or chip system may further include at least one memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the communication device.
- the chip or chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete devices.
- the chip or chip system may also include interface circuitry that provides program instructions and/or data to the at least one processor.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the communication system provided in this application.
- FIGS. 2a to 2d are some schematic diagrams of the satellite communication process provided in this application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the satellite communication process in the 5G system provided in this application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the communication method provided in this application.
- FIGS. 5 and 6 are schematic diagrams illustrating some applications of the communication method provided in this application.
- FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided in this application.
- FIGS 8 to 11 are some schematic diagrams of the communication device provided in this application.
- Terminal device can be a wireless terminal device that can receive network device scheduling and instruction information.
- the wireless terminal device can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
- Terminal devices can be various communication kits with wireless communication capabilities (kits may include, for example, antennas, power supply modules, cables, and Wi-Fi modules). Terminal devices can also be communication modules with satellite communication capabilities, satellite phones or components thereof, and very small aperture terminals (VSATs). Terminal devices can be mobile terminal devices, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers, and data cards. For example, they can be portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-embedded, or vehicle-mounted mobile devices that exchange voice and/or data with a wireless access network. Examples include personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), tablets, and computers with wireless transceiver capabilities.
- PCS personal communication service
- SIP session initiation protocol
- WLL wireless local loop
- PDAs personal digital assistants
- Wireless terminal equipment can also be referred to as a system, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station (MS), remote station, access point (AP), remote terminal, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, subscriber station (SS), customer premises equipment (CPE), terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile terminal (MT), drone, etc.
- Terminal equipment can also be wearable devices and next-generation communication systems, such as terminal equipment in 6G communication systems or terminal equipment in future public land mobile networks (PLMNs).
- PLMNs public land mobile networks
- the terminal device in this application may also refer to a chip, modem, system-on-a-chip (SoC) or communication platform that may include radio frequency (RF) components, etc., that is mainly responsible for related communication functions.
- SoC system-on-a-chip
- Network equipment This can be equipment in a wireless network.
- network equipment can be a RAN node (or device) that connects terminal devices to the wireless network, and can also be called a base station.
- RAN equipment include: base station, evolved NodeB (eNodeB), gNB (gNodeB) in 5G communication systems, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), home base station (e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) access point (AP), etc.
- network equipment can include centralized unit (CU) nodes, distributed unit (DU) nodes, or RAN equipment including CU nodes and DU nodes.
- CU centralized unit
- DU distributed unit
- RAN equipment including CU nodes and DU nodes.
- RAN nodes can also be macro base stations, micro base stations or indoor stations, relay nodes or donor nodes, or radio controllers in cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenarios.
- RAN nodes can also be servers, wearable devices, vehicles, or in-vehicle equipment.
- the access network equipment in vehicle-to-everything (V2X) technology can be a roadside unit (RSU).
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- RSU roadside unit
- RAN nodes collaborate to assist the terminal in achieving wireless access, with each RAN node performing a portion of the base station's functions.
- RAN nodes can be central units (CUs), distributed units (DUs), CU-control plane (CPs), CU-user plane (UPs), or radio units (RUs).
- CUs and DUs can be separate entities or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU).
- RUs can be included in radio frequency equipment or radio frequency units, such as remote radio units (RRUs), active antenna units (AAUs), or remote radio heads (RRHs).
- RRUs remote radio units
- AAUs active antenna units
- RRHs remote radio heads
- CU or CU-CP and CU-UP
- DU or RU
- RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning.
- O-CU open CU
- DU can also be called O-DU
- CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP
- CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP
- RU can also be called O-RU.
- this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and RU as examples.
- Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software modules and hardware modules.
- This protocol layer may include a control plane protocol layer and a user plane protocol layer.
- the control plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: radio resource control (RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, or physical (PHY) layer, etc.
- the user plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, or physical layer, etc.
- SDAP service data adaptation protocol
- Network devices can be other devices that provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology or form of the network device. For ease of description, the embodiments of this application are not limited.
- Network equipment may also include core network equipment, such as the Mobility Management Entity (MME), Home Subscriber Server (HSS), Serving Gateway (S-GW), Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF), and Public Data Network Gateway (PDN Gateway) in 4G networks; and access and mobility management function (AMF), user plane function (UPF), or session management function (SMF) in 5G networks.
- MME Mobility Management Entity
- HSS Home Subscriber Server
- S-GW Serving Gateway
- PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
- PDN Gateway Public Data Network Gateway
- AMF access and mobility management function
- UPF user plane function
- SMF Public Data Network Gateway
- the network device mentioned above can also be a network node with artificial intelligence (AI) capabilities, which can provide AI services to terminals or other network devices.
- AI artificial intelligence
- it can be an AI node, computing power node, RAN node with AI capabilities, core network element with AI capabilities, etc. on the network side (access network or core network).
- the device for implementing the function of the network device can be the network device itself, or it can be a device capable of supporting the network device in implementing that function, such as a chip system, which can be installed in the network device.
- a network device being used to implement the function of the network device is used to describe the technical solutions provided in this application embodiment.
- Configuration and Pre-configuration In this application, both configuration and pre-configuration are used.
- Configuration refers to the network device sending configuration information or parameter values of some parameters to the terminal device through messages or signaling, so that the terminal device can determine the communication parameters or resources during transmission based on these values or information.
- Pre-configuration is similar to configuration; it can be parameter information or parameter values that the network device and the terminal device have negotiated in advance, or it can be parameter information or parameter values that the network device or the terminal device uses as specified by the standard protocol, or it can be parameter information or parameter values that are pre-stored in the network device or the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
- “send” and “receive” indicate the direction of signal transmission.
- “send information to XX” can be understood as the destination of the information being XX, which may include sending directly through the air interface or sending indirectly through the air interface by other units or modules.
- “Receive information from YY” can be understood as the source of the information being YY, which may include receiving directly from YY through the air interface or receiving indirectly from YY through the air interface by other units or modules.
- “Send” can also be understood as the "output” of the chip interface, and “receive” can also be understood as the "input” of the chip interface.
- sending and receiving can occur between devices, such as between network devices and terminal devices, or within a device, such as between components, modules, chips, software modules, or hardware modules within the device via buses, wiring, or interfaces.
- a geographic region may be replaced with a region.
- a region is fixed relative to the Earth, or it can be understood as a geographic area that is fixed relative to the Earth.
- a region may have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographic location, etc.
- a "region" may also have an altitude attribute, meaning a region can be understood as a geographic area at a given altitude or within a given altitude range.
- a region may refer to a geographic area on the ground with an elevation of 0 km or within a range of 0 km ⁇ 2 km, or a geographic area at a certain average altitude, or a geographic area at a specific altitude, such as an elevation of 10 km or within a range of 10 km ⁇ 3 km.
- the aforementioned region fixed relative to the Earth can also be referred to as a "wave position,” “geographic region,” etc.
- wave position a region fixed relative to the Earth
- geographic region a region fixed relative to the Earth.
- other names are also possible, and this application does not specifically limit the name of the region fixed relative to the Earth.
- the shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas of different regions may be the same or different.
- the geographical locations of the different regions may differ.
- the different regions may or may not overlap.
- the region being fixed relative to the Earth can be understood as follows: the region's outline, size, or geographical location remains unchanged; for example, the region's outline, size, or geographical location does not change over time.
- the region being fixed relative to the Earth can be understood as follows: the region's outline and the points within it can be described using a fixed Earth coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the region's outline in the fixed Earth coordinate system remain constant.
- the shape of the region can be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc.
- the shape of the region can also be irregular, without restriction.
- the shape of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different shapes. The same network device can also define multiple region shapes. Similarly, the size, radius, and area of a region can also be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different sizes, radii, or areas. The same network device can also define multiple region sizes, multiple region radii, or multiple region areas.
- the Earth's surface can be divided into multiple regions, and these regions can be indexed (e.g., numbered). Terminal devices and network devices can agree on the numbering method for these regions (e.g., starting from 1 or 0) and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Alternatively, the protocol can define the numbering method for these regions and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Based on the region indexes, information such as the region's geographical location can be determined.
- the multiple regions can completely cover the Earth's surface, such that any location on the Earth's surface belongs to a certain region; or, the multiple regions can also cover part of the geographical location on Earth, for example, the multiple regions may not cover the Earth's South Pole and/or North Pole, that is, the South Pole and/or North Pole may not exist in the region.
- the method of dividing the network into multiple zones can be defined by a protocol or by the network device.
- Different network devices can define the same or different division methods.
- the same network device can also define multiple division methods.
- multiple grids can be defined to divide the Earth's surface. For example, a grid at an altitude of 0 km or within a range of 0 km ⁇ 2 km can be divided into 1-degree latitude and longitude grids, generating 129,600 regions. At an altitude of 10 km or within a range of 10 km ⁇ 3 km, another 1-degree latitude and longitude grid can be used, generating yet another 129,600 regions. When indexing these grids, the index range of a single-layer grid needs to be expanded.
- the total index could be 0, 1, ..., 129599, 129600, 129601, ..., 259199, where the first 129,600 indices represent the grid index at an altitude of 0 km, and the last 129,600 indices represent the grid index at an altitude of 10 km.
- the granularity of the latitude and longitude grid can be determined based on the type of network device. For instance, a relatively small granularity can be used for discretization when the network device is a LEO satellite, and a relatively large granularity can be used when the network device is a GEO satellite.
- the Earth's surface can be divided using latitude and longitude grids of various granularities. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a portion of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees.
- the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree at an altitude of 0 km, and the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees at an altitude of 10 km.
- the Earth's surface can be divided by administrative regions.
- a township-level administrative region could be considered as a region.
- the projection of one of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered as a region. Since GEO satellites are stationary relative to the Earth, the projection of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered fixed relative to the Earth.
- the Earth's surface can be divided using a combination of different methods. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a part of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided according to its administrative region.
- a first level of region division can be performed using a 10-degree granularity latitude and longitude grid, a second level using a 6-degree granularity grid, and a third level using a 1-degree granularity grid.
- the number of regions at the first level is greater than the number at the second level
- the number of regions at the second level is greater than the number at the third level.
- each level of region can be individually numbered.
- "instruction” may include direct instruction and indirect instruction, as well as explicit instruction and implicit instruction.
- the information indicated by a certain piece of information (as described below, the instruction information) is called the information to be instructed.
- the information to be instructed there are many ways to indicate the information to be instructed, such as, but not limited to, directly indicating the information to be instructed, such as the information to be instructed itself or its index. It can also indirectly indicate the information to be instructed by indicating other information, where there is an association between the other information and the information to be instructed; or it can only indicate a part of the information to be instructed, while the other parts of the information to be instructed are known or pre-agreed upon.
- the instruction can be implemented by using a pre-agreed (e.g., protocol predefined) arrangement order of various information, thereby reducing the instruction overhead to a certain extent.
- a pre-agreed e.g., protocol predefined
- This application does not limit the specific method of instruction. It is understood that for the sender of the instruction information, the instruction information can be used to indicate the information to be instructed; for the receiver of the instruction information, the instruction information can be used to determine the information to be instructed.
- This application can be applied to long-term evolution (LTE) systems, new radio (NR) systems, or new wireless vehicle-to-everything (NR V2X) systems; it can also be applied to systems with hybrid LTE and 5G networks; or device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, machine-to-machine (M2M) communication systems, Internet of Things (IoT) systems, or drone communication systems; or communication systems supporting multiple wireless technologies, such as those supporting LTE and NR technologies; or non-terrestrial communication systems, such as satellite communication systems and high-altitude communication platforms.
- LTE long-term evolution
- NR new radio
- NR V2X new wireless vehicle-to-everything
- D2D device-to-device
- M2M machine-to-machine
- IoT Internet of Things
- drone communication systems or communication systems supporting multiple wireless technologies, such as those supporting LTE and NR technologies
- non-terrestrial communication systems such as satellite communication systems and high-altitude communication platforms.
- this communication system can also be applied to narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT) systems or other communication systems, wherein the communication system includes network devices and terminal devices, with the network devices acting as configuration information sending entities and the terminal devices acting as configuration information receiving entities.
- NB-IoT narrowband Internet of Things
- one entity sends configuration information to another entity and sends data to or receives data from another entity; the other entity receives the configuration information and, based on the configuration information, sends data to or receives data from the entity that sent the configuration information.
- This application can be applied to terminal devices in a connected or active state, as well as to terminal devices in an inactive or idle state.
- the communication system includes a radio access network (RAN) 100 and a core network 200.
- the communication system 1000 may also include an Internet 300.
- the RAN 100 includes at least one RAN node (110a and 110b in Figure 1, collectively referred to as 110), and may also include at least one terminal (120a-120j in Figure 1, collectively referred to as 120).
- the RAN 100 may also include other RAN nodes, such as wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices (not shown in Figure 1).
- the terminal 120 is wirelessly connected to the RAN node 110, and the RAN node 110 is wirelessly or wiredly connected to the core network 200.
- the core network equipment in the core network 200 and the RAN node 110 in the RAN 100 can be independent and different physical devices, or they can be the same physical device integrating the logical functions of the core network equipment and the logical functions of the RAN node. Terminals can be connected to each other, as can RAN nodes, via wired or wireless means.
- RAN100 in Figure 1 may include a terrestrial base station, wherein the terrestrial base station may include a TN cell (i.e., the signal of the TN cell can be transmitted and received through the terrestrial base station); and RAN100 in Figure 1 may also include a non-terrestrial base station, taking a satellite as an example, the satellite may include an NTN cell (i.e., the signal of the NTN cell can be transmitted and received through the satellite).
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- the terrestrial communication system may be, for example, a long term evolution (LTE) system, a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS), a 5G communication system, or a new radio (NR) system, or a communication system that is the next step in the development of 5G communication systems, etc., and is not limited here.
- LTE long term evolution
- UMTS universal mobile telecommunications system
- 5G communication system 5G communication system
- NR new radio
- satellite communication offers advantages such as wider coverage, communication costs independent of transmission distance, and the ability to overcome natural geographical barriers like oceans, deserts, and mountains.
- satellite communication can serve as an effective supplement. It is generally believed that non-terrestrial network communication has different channel characteristics compared to terrestrial network communication, such as large transmission delays and Doppler frequency offsets. For example, the round-trip time (RTT) of GEO satellite communication is 238–270 milliseconds (ms), while that of LEO satellite communication is 8 ms–20 ms.
- RTT round-trip time
- satellite communication systems can be classified into three types: geostationary orbit (GEO) satellite communication systems (also known as geosynchronous orbit satellite systems); medium orbit (MEO) satellite communication systems; and low orbit (LEO) satellite communication systems.
- GEO geostationary orbit
- MEO medium orbit
- LEO low orbit
- GEO satellites also known as geostationary orbit satellites, orbit at an altitude of 35,786 kilometers. Their main advantages are relative stationary position and large coverage area. However, GEO satellites also have significant drawbacks: their large distance from Earth necessitates larger antennas; their transmission latency is relatively high, around 0.5 seconds, failing to meet the demands of real-time services; and their orbital resources are relatively scarce, resulting in high launch costs and an inability to provide coverage to polar regions. MEO satellites, orbiting at altitudes between 2,000 and 35,786 km, can achieve global coverage with a relatively small number of satellites, but their transmission latency is higher than that of LEO satellites, and they are primarily used for positioning and navigation.
- LEO satellites orbiting at altitudes between 300 and 2,000 km are called Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellites.
- LEO satellites are lower in altitude than MEO and GEO satellites, resulting in lower data propagation latency, lower power loss, and relatively lower launch costs. Therefore, LEO satellite communication networks have made significant progress and attracted considerable attention in recent years.
- satellite equipment can be categorized into transparent mode and regenerative mode based on its operating mode.
- the satellite and the gateway station act as relays, specifically the Remote Radio Unit shown in Figure 2a. Communication between the terminal equipment and the gNB requires this relay process.
- the satellite in transparent transmission mode, the satellite has a relay forwarding function.
- the satellite when the satellite (including GEO satellites, MEO satellites, LEO satellites, etc.) operates in transparent transmission mode, the satellite has a relay forwarding function.
- the gateway station (or signaling station) has the function of a base station or part of the function of a base station; in this case, the gateway station can be regarded as a base station.
- the base station can be deployed separately from the gateway station, in which case the delay of the feeder link includes two parts: the delay from the satellite to the gateway station and the delay from the gateway station to the gNB.
- the transparent transmission mode can be used as an example where the gateway station and gNB are together or in close proximity.
- the feeder link delay can be calculated by adding the delay from the satellite to the gateway station and the delay from the gateway station to the gNB.
- the satellite and the gateway station act as gNBs and can communicate with the terminal devices.
- the satellite in regeneration mode, the satellite has the functions of a base station or some of the functions of a base station, and in this case, the satellite can be regarded as a base station.
- the satellite when the satellite (including GEO satellites, MEO satellites, LEO satellites, etc.) is working in regeneration mode, compared with the implementation shown in Figure 2b, the satellite has the function of a base station or part of the function of a base station.
- the satellite can be regarded as a base station (i.e., an airborne base station).
- the satellite can be implemented in other ways, such as by a drone or a high-altitude platform as shown in the figures.
- NTN and terrestrial network base stations can be interconnected through a shared core network. They can also achieve more timely assistance and interconnection through interfaces defined between base stations.
- the interface between base stations is called the Xn interface
- the interface between the base station and the core network is called the NG interface.
- both NTN nodes and terrestrial nodes can achieve interoperability and collaboration through these interfaces.
- satellites acting as network devices can transmit ephemeris information so that the recipient of this ephemeris information (e.g., a terminal device, its base station, or other satellites) can determine relevant information about the satellite's orbit based on the ephemeris information.
- the ephemeris information may include one or more of the information in Table 2 below.
- the terminal device may obtain one or more of the information in Table 2 through pre-configuration.
- LTE long term evolution
- NR new radio
- a 5G satellite communication system architecture is shown in Figure 3.
- Ground terminal equipment accesses the network through the 5G New Radio interface, while 5G base stations are deployed on satellites and connected to the ground core network via wireless links. Simultaneously, wireless links exist between satellites to facilitate signaling interaction and user data transmission between base stations.
- the devices and interfaces in Figure 3 are described below:
- 5G Core Network This includes services such as user access control, mobility management, session management, user security authentication, and billing. It consists of multiple functional units, which can be divided into control plane and data plane functional entities.
- the Access and Mobility Management Unit (AMF) is responsible for user access management, security authentication, and mobility management.
- the User Plane Unit (UPF) is responsible for managing user plane data transmission and traffic statistics.
- the Session Management Function (SMF) is mainly used for session management in the mobile network, such as session establishment, modification, and release.
- Ground station responsible for forwarding signaling and service data between satellite base stations and the 5G core network.
- 5G New Radio The wireless link between a terminal and a base station.
- Xn interface The interface between 5G base stations, mainly used for signaling interactions such as handover.
- NG interface The interface between 5G base stations and 5G core networks, mainly used for exchanging non-access stratum (NAS) signaling of the core network and user service data.
- NAS non-access stratum
- network devices in terrestrial network communication systems and satellites in NTN communication systems can be uniformly considered as network devices.
- the apparatus used to implement the functions of a network device can be a network device itself; it can also be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device in implementing that function, such as a chip system, which can be installed within the network device.
- a satellite is used as an example to illustrate the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application. It is understood that when the methods provided by the embodiments of this application are applied to terrestrial network communication systems, the actions performed by the satellite can be applied to the base station or network device for execution.
- the device for implementing the functions of the terminal device can be the terminal device itself; it can also be a device capable of supporting the terminal device in implementing the functions, such as a chip system, which can be installed in the terminal device.
- the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
- the device for implementing the functions of the terminal device is a terminal or UE as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in this application embodiment.
- the aforementioned satellites can be geostationary satellites, non-geostationary satellites, artificial satellites, low-Earth orbit satellites, medium-Earth orbit satellites, and high-Earth orbit satellites, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
- TN terrestrial network
- network equipment may not be fixed in a certain place on the ground.
- the network equipment may be a high-speed mobile device belonging to a non-terrestrial network (NTN) cell, including but not limited to satellite equipment such as low-Earth orbit satellites, medium-Earth orbit satellites, and high-Earth orbit satellites.
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- the satellite equipment to which NTN cells belong may move at high speeds.
- the reference signal reception strength of an NTN cell is strong, but this does not mean that the reference signal reception strength of the NTN cell will remain strong at one or more subsequent moments. This makes the beam management process of TN cells no longer applicable.
- Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in this application. The method includes the following steps.
- the methods shown in Figure 4 and Figure 7 below are illustrated using different communication devices (such as a first terminal device, network device, etc.) as examples of the execution subjects of the interaction steps, but this application does not limit the execution subject of the interaction steps.
- the interaction steps can be executed by a communication device, or by a chip, chip system, processor, circuit, logic module, or software that supports the communication device to implement the interaction steps.
- the network device can be an access network device, which can be an ORAN network element.
- the network device may include O-CU, O-DU, and O-RU; in step S400 or S700 below, the O-RU can be controlled to send the first visibility information through the O-CU and/or O-DU.
- the network device may include O-CU, O-DU, and O-RU; in step S702 below, the O-CU and/or O-DU can be used to control the O-RU to send the first configuration information.
- the network device sends first visibility information, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first visibility information.
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device.
- step S400 is optional.
- the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information in multiple ways.
- the first terminal device can obtain first visibility information based on instructions from other devices (such as terminal devices, network devices, etc.), which can reduce the implementation complexity of the first terminal device.
- devices such as terminal devices, network devices, etc.
- the first terminal device determines the first visibility information by obtaining information from its own information acquisition module (such as camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.).
- its own information acquisition module such as camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.
- steps S400 and S401 can be implemented in one of them, that is, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information based on one of these two steps.
- both steps S400 and S401 can be executed. If the first visibility information received by the first terminal device in step S400 is inconsistent with the first visibility information obtained by the first terminal device in step S401, the first terminal device may arbitrarily discard/ignore one of them, or the first terminal device may discard/ignore one of them based on the instruction of the network device; no limitation is made here.
- visibility information may carry the identifier of the area or the identifier of the terminal device.
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angular intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical region. If the terminal device within the first geographical region includes the first terminal device itself, the first visibility information may include an identifier of the first geographical region. In this case, the visibility information can be understood as regionally granular visibility information.
- the first visibility information may include the identifier of the first terminal device.
- the visibility information can be understood as terminal device-level visibility information.
- visibility information indicates the degree of obstruction in the transmission path of signals between network devices and terminal devices, and this obstruction reflects the communication quality.
- the communication device can use visibility information to determine (or select) one or more network devices with higher communication quality for communication with the terminal device, thereby improving communication efficiency. This can be achieved, for example, through one or more of the following examples.
- terminal devices can select network devices that are not blocked (or have only minor blockage) based on signal obstruction, which can reduce unnecessary switching and reselection and improve communication efficiency.
- terminal devices or network devices can predict the timing of signal interruptions based on signal obstruction and prepare/switch to network devices with higher communication quality in advance to improve communication efficiency.
- terminal devices can communicate with network devices of higher quality at reasonable locations and/or in appropriate postures based on signal obstruction, which can improve the success rate of signal transmission and thus enhance communication efficiency.
- terminal devices can select unobstructed (or less obstructed) network devices for positioning based on signal obstruction, which can improve positioning accuracy and enable related communication services through higher positioning accuracy, thereby improving communication efficiency.
- visibility information can be replaced with other terms, such as visibility information of NTN communication, occlusion information, occlusion information of NTN communication, NTN transmission environment information, long-term link quality information, or NTN transmission path information, etc.
- the visibility information includes any of the following:
- Information 1 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a visible path
- Information 3 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a line-of-sight (LOS) path;
- NLOS non-line of sight
- the order of the four communication qualities indicated by the above four indications from high to low can be: communication quality indicated by information 1 (or communication quality indicated by information 2), communication quality indicated by information 3, and communication quality indicated by information 4.
- the communication quality indicated by the visibility information can be the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality. That is, the visibility information is used to indicate the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality between network devices located within that spatial angular range and terminal devices located within that geographical area.
- LOS paths and NLOS paths can be identified in one or more of the following ways.
- the communication signal transmitted by the signal transmitter based on a certain transmit power has a received signal strength that is greater than the received signal strength that would be greater if the same communication signal were transmitted via a non-linear communication (NLOS) path.
- NLOS non-linear communication
- the first communication device can determine whether the transmission path of the reference signal is an LOS path or an NLOS path based on the received signal strength of the reference signal.
- the first communication device can determine that the reference signal is transmitted through the LOS path.
- the first communication device can determine that the reference signal is transmitted through the NLOS path.
- the threshold can be configured by the network device, pre-configured, or an expected value determined based on the signal reception strength of a reference point.
- the communication signal transmitted by the signal transmitter based on a certain transmit power has a transmission distance via a LOS path that is generally less than or equal to the transmission distance via an NLOS path.
- the first communication device can determine whether the transmission path of the reference signal is an LOS path or an NLOS path based on the signal attenuation information of the received reference signal.
- the terminal device can determine the signal attenuation information through a variety of parameters, such as one or more of the signal transmission parameters configured in the network device, the ephemeris information of the satellite base station, atmospheric transmission compensation information, and reference point information.
- Method 3 Signal offset information, such as signal timing offset rate, signal frequency drift rate, etc.
- the communication signal transmitted by the signal transmitter based on a certain transmit power has a signal drift that is generally less than or equal to the signal drift that is generated when the communication signal is transmitted through a LOS path.
- the first communication device can determine whether the transmission path of the reference signal is an LOS path or an NLOS path based on the signal drift information corresponding to the received reference signal.
- the terminal device can determine the signal drift information through a variety of parameters, such as one or more of the following: signal transmission parameters configured by the network device, ephemeris information of the satellite base station, atmospheric transmission compensation information, and reference point information.
- the following example uses visibility information to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angular intervals and a terminal device located within one or more geographical regions, along with some implementation examples.
- one or more spatial angular intervals are considered as N sub-intervals
- one or more geographical regions are considered as M sub-regions.
- the visibility information includes P pieces of information, and correspondingly, each of these P first pieces of information indicates a communication quality.
- any one of the pieces of information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one of the N sub-intervals contained in the spatial angular interval and a terminal device located within one of the M sub-regions contained in the geographical region.
- N, M, and P are all positive integers.
- the P first sub-information pieces are used to indicate the P communication quality, which can be understood as a one-to-one correspondence between the P first sub-information pieces and the P communication quality, or that the p-th first sub-information piece among the P first sub-information pieces is used to indicate the p-th communication quality among the P communication quality, where p is from 1 to P.
- the visibility information may also include at least one of the following information A through information E.
- the first communication device can also obtain more information through at least one of the above methods, which can help the first communication device quickly identify one or more network devices communicating with the first terminal device.
- At least one of the above information A to information E may be carried in other messages/signaling/information that are different from visibility information.
- At least one of the above information A through information E may be pre-configured.
- the spatial regions corresponding to the P first sub-informations contained in the visibility information can be pre-configured, such as the spatial region where the satellite base station transmitting the visibility information is located.
- the geographical regions corresponding to the P first sub-information contained in the visibility information can be pre-configured, such as the spatial region where the terminal device receiving the visibility information is located.
- the P first sub-information pieces contained in the visibility information can implicitly indicate the confidence level of each first sub-information piece in a sequential order.
- the start time when the P first sub-information contained in the visibility information is valid can be the time when the terminal device receives the visibility information, and the duration for which the P first sub-information is valid can be pre-configured.
- the difference between the communication quality indicated by the P first sub-information contained in the visibility information and the communication quality of the pre-configured reference point is below a threshold.
- visibility information can indicate the relationship between spatial angle ranges, visibility information, and geographical regions in various ways, such as tables, formulas, and different field meanings. The following will use the example of visibility information indicating this relationship in the form of a table to illustrate the relationship.
- visibility information indicates the relationship between spatial angle intervals, visibility information, and geographical regions.
- the first column contains information A from the preceding text
- the second column contains "P first sub-information items" from the preceding text
- the third column contains information C.
- the first column corresponds to "Spatial Angle Range,” the second column to “Visibility Information,” and the third column to "Geographic Region.”
- Information from different columns within the same row indicates a relationship between the information in those columns.
- the visibility information in the second column is explained using visibility as an example (e.g., a value of "1" indicates visibility, and a value of "0” indicates invisibility).
- the first row indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and a terminal device located in “Geographic Region #1” is “Visible (value 1),” indicating high communication quality.
- the second row indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #2” and a terminal device located in “Geographic Region #1” is "Invisible (value 0),” indicating low communication quality.
- the descriptions of the spatial angle intervals in Table 4 can be discretized into different intervals, as shown in Table 5.
- the azimuth and zenith angles can be determined using the east-north-up (ENU) coordinate system, which can also be called the station center coordinate system.
- ENU east-north-up
- a rectangular coordinate system can be formed with the location of the terminal device as the station center (i.e., the origin O of the coordinate system), the z-axis coinciding with the normal to the ellipsoid (positive, i.e., celestial direction); the y-axis coinciding with the minor semi-axis of the ellipsoid (i.e., north direction); and the x-axis coinciding with the major semi-axis of the Earth ellipsoid (i.e., east direction).
- the zenith angle can be the angle between the connection line and the z-axis
- the azimuth angle can be the angle between the projection of the connection line onto the ground and the x-axis (or y-axis).
- coordinate parameters of a spatial region can be configured in a geocentric coordinate system with the Earth's center as the center.
- Another example is configuring the indexes and identifiers corresponding to the aforementioned azimuth, zenith angles, and coordinate parameters.
- Yet another example is configuring a specific geographic region (e.g., this geographic region can be configured using wave position, region index, region number, etc., as described in the previous terminology introduction), and then configuring the spatial range at a certain altitude above that geographic region as the spatial region represented by the spatial angle interval.
- the descriptions of the geographical regions in Table 4 can be discretized into different intervals, as shown in Table 6.
- the geographic region in addition to the longitude, latitude, and altitude intervals shown in Table 6, other information can be used to configure the geographic region.
- the geographic region is circular, the coordinates of a configured reference point can be used as the center, and the configured length value can be used as the diameter or radius of the circle.
- the geographic region if the geographic region is rectangular, the coordinates of the four vertices of the rectangle can be configured.
- the geographic region can also be a regular shape such as a hexagon, pentagon, or ellipse, or an irregular shape, and the coordinates of the outline of the regular or irregular shape can be configured.
- the geographic region can be configured using wave position, region index, region number, etc., as described in the previous terminology introduction.
- the description of the "altitude range” shown in Table 6 can also be in the form of ">x (x is a real number) m.
- the visibility information in Table 4 is implemented in other forms.
- the visibility information is illustrated by the example of "whether it is LOS" (for example, a value of "1" indicates LOS, and a value of "0" indicates NLOS).
- the first row of information in Table 7 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #1” and the terminal device located in “Geographic Region #1” is "LOS (value is 1)", which indicates a high communication quality.
- the second row indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #2” and the terminal device located in “Geographic Region #1” is "NLOS (value is 0)", which indicates a low communication quality.
- Table 4 may also include the information C described above, as shown in the last column of Table 8 below.
- the first row of Table 8 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #1” and the terminal device located in “Geographic Region #1” is “visible (value 1)", and the confidence level of this visibility information is 1, indicating that the confidence level of this visibility information is high.
- the third row of Table 8 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #3" and the terminal device located in “Geographic Region #1” is “visible (value 1)", and the confidence level of this visibility information is 0, indicating that the confidence level of this visibility information is low.
- Table 4 may also include the information D described above, as shown in the last column of Table 9 below.
- the first row of Table 9 indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and a terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1” is valid for "1 day,” meaning that the visibility information will expire after 1 day.
- the fourth row of Table 9 indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #1” and a terminal device located in "Geographic Region #2” is valid for "1 year,” meaning that the visibility information will expire after 1 year.
- Table 4 may also include the information D described above, as shown in the last two columns of Table 10 below.
- the information in the third row of Table 10 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #3" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1” is "NLOS (value is 2)", and that during communication in the frequency domain resources corresponding to [1GHz ⁇ 3GHz], the additional loss of the terminal device compared to the terminal device located at the reference point is 10dB.
- the fourth row of Table 10 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #4" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #2” is "NLOS (value is 2)". Furthermore, during communication in the frequency domain resources corresponding to 6 GHz and above, the additional loss of this terminal device compared to the terminal device located at the reference point is 20 dB.
- the aforementioned visibility information is the first visibility information used to indicate a location at one or more spatial angles.
- the column indicating the geographic region is replaced with the terminal device, which represents the first visibility.
- the information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device and a first terminal device located within one or more spatial angular intervals (i.e., the terminal device). Example of implementation at the granular level.
- the first terminal device determines, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein, the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- RS reference signal
- the network device corresponding to an RS can be understood as the network device that provides or transmits the RS.
- the resources of the RS can be configured by the network device itself or by other network devices; this is not limited here.
- the remaining service duration of a network device providing services to a terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the current time and the time when the network device stops providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the start time and the end time of the network device providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the end time and the latest time when the measurement was started.
- the termination time of the network device's service to the terminal device can also be understood as the cutoff time of the network device's service to the terminal device, that is, the network device will stop (or suspend) the service provided to the terminal device at the cutoff time.
- the remaining service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as remaining serviceable duration, remaining available duration, remaining communication duration, or remaining communication duration.
- the first terminal device can determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. It can be understood that the visibility information can be used to determine the remaining service duration.
- first visibility information can be used to select/determine a first time period, wherein the first time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods indicated by the visibility information with communication quality better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a second time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods indicated by the visibility information with poor communication quality). Furthermore, within this first time period, the total duration of time periods satisfying one or more of the following conditions, starting from the current time, can be the remaining service duration:
- Condition 1 The duration during which the expected elevation angle is greater than the elevation angle threshold
- Condition 2 The duration for which the expected signal reception strength is greater than the threshold
- the expected channel transmission loss (which can be determined based on parameters such as the relative position, distance, and frequency between the terminal device and the network device) is less than the threshold for a certain duration.
- the parameters involved in conditions 1 to 3 above can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the network device.
- the network device can provide services (or provide better services) to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the remaining service duration for the network device to provide services to the terminal device can be determined based on one or more of the above conditions.
- the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. This can be understood as: the remaining service duration is used for preemptive recovery before beam failure; or, it can be understood as: the remaining service duration can be used to determine whether the current beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the first RS) is about to fail; or, the remaining service duration can be a period of time before the network device terminates its service to the terminal device.
- the remaining service duration for beam failure recovery can be replaced by: the remaining service duration being used for beam failure determination, determining whether a beam is about to fail, triggering beam failure recovery, or determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, etc.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second configuration information, which is used to configure the first RS.
- the first terminal device can receive the first RS for beam failure detection based on the configuration of the network device, enabling the terminal device to implement the beam failure detection process based on the configuration of the network device.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving indication information for indicating a first threshold; wherein the remaining service duration and the first threshold are used for beam failure recovery.
- the first terminal device can receive indication information for indicating the first threshold, so that the first terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on the remaining service duration and the first threshold.
- the first threshold can be 100 milliseconds, 500 milliseconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds, or the first threshold can be other time values.
- the first threshold can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
- the first terminal device may determine that the beam corresponding to the first RS is about to or has already failed (or the service provided by the network device corresponding to the first RS to the first terminal device is about to or has already been interrupted). To this end, the first terminal device may send a beam recovery request message to restore the communication beam.
- the beam recovery request information may include information sent by the terminal device during the beam failure recovery (BFR) process, such as a link recovery request (LRR), a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE) sending an indication of BFR, or a random access request.
- BFR beam failure recovery
- LRR link recovery request
- CE medium access control control element
- the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device.
- This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself.
- the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure detection, and this remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device, and this remaining service duration can be used for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level, which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal obstruction of the network device, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- FIG. 5 there are four terminal devices located at different positions within a certain ground area: UE#1, UE#2, UE#3, and UE#4.
- the interval between the different UEs is 5 meters (m).
- the network device is a satellite, as described above regarding visibility information, signal transmission between the satellite and the UEs is easily affected by signal obstruction. Furthermore, for the same satellite, the visibility information differs at different locations on the ground.
- Figure 6 illustrates the signal obstruction between the same satellite and the four terminal devices shown in Figure 5.
- the gray-filled area represents the invisible area corresponding to the network device, while the non-gray-filled area represents the visible area.
- This example demonstrates that in the ground area, the visibility information of terminal devices spaced 5 meters apart often varies significantly.
- a strong reference signal reception strength in an NTN cell at a given moment does not guarantee that the strong signal reception strength will remain strong at subsequent moments.
- the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level. This can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first configuration information, the first configuration information being used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection (CBD); wherein the beam recovery request information is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the second RS is an RS determined from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- first configuration information being used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer
- the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection (CBD)
- the beam recovery request information is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery
- the second RS is an RS determined from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
- the first terminal device can also receive first configuration information for configuring L RSs for candidate beam detection, and the first terminal device can determine a second RS among the L RSs based on first visibility information.
- visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, and improve beam management efficiency.
- the beam recovery request information is associated with the second RS, which can be understood as the second RS being used to determine the beam recovery request information.
- the terminal device can send the beam recovery request information based on the second RS.
- the method may further include: the first terminal device receiving first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery satisfies a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold (e.g., the threshold is 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes, or the threshold can be other time values).
- a threshold e.g., the threshold is 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes, or the threshold can be other time values.
- the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs;
- the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold (e.g., the threshold is 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes, or the threshold can be other time values).
- a threshold e.g., the threshold is 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes, or the threshold can be other time values.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS (i.e., the second RS) for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
- the RS i.e., the second RS
- the first condition can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
- the first indication information and the first configuration information may be carried in the same message/signaling, or the first indication information and the second configuration information described below may be carried in the same message/signaling.
- the service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information.
- the service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the start and end times during the process in which the first visibility information indicates that the network device is visible to the first terminal device (or the first visibility information indicates that the communication quality of the network device providing services to the first terminal device is better than a threshold).
- the first terminal device can determine the serviceable duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information.
- the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a third time period, wherein the third time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a fourth time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is poor).
- the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the serviceable duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
- service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as effective service time, effective service duration, effective communication duration, or effective communication duration.
- the cumulative overpass service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information.
- the cumulative overpass service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the total duration of one or more time periods (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous) included in the process of the network device being overpassed relative to the first terminal device, as indicated by the first visibility information.
- the first terminal device can determine the cumulative overpass service duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information.
- the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a fifth time period, wherein the fifth time period can include a fifth time period in which the network device is in the process of overpassing relative to the first terminal device, and the total duration of one or more time periods included in the fifth time period (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous).
- the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the cumulative overpass service duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
- the cumulative service duration over the top can be replaced with other terms, such as cumulative service time over the top, cumulative effective service duration over the top, cumulative communication duration over the top, or cumulative communicable duration over the top.
- the method may further include: the first terminal device receiving second indication information indicating that the RS for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
- the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device;
- the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery (i.e., the second RS) based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the expected signal strength can be determined based on the first visibility information.
- the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the first terminal device can be understood as the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the terminal device at a certain time in the future (or a certain time period), or the strength of the signal received by the terminal device at a certain time in the future.
- the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, that a network device and the first terminal device will be visible to each other at a future time (or a certain time period) (or, the communication quality indicated by the first visibility information is better than a threshold). Furthermore, the first terminal device can receive a first signal strength of the network device's signal at the current time (or a historical time), and correspondingly, the first terminal device can predict a second signal strength of the network device at the aforementioned future time (or a certain time period) based on the first signal strength, i.e., the second signal strength is the expected signal strength.
- the basis for the prediction may include the aforementioned first visibility information, the path loss change information between the network device and the first terminal device (e.g., determined by the relative position between the network device and the first terminal device), the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) information of the satellite where the network device is located, etc.
- EIRP equivalent isotropically radiated power
- the above signal strength can be the reference signal receiving power (RSRP).
- RSRP reference signal receiving power
- the signal strength mentioned above can be replaced with other parameters used to characterize signal reception quality, such as reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ).
- RSSQ reference signal receiving quality
- the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; before determining the RSs used for beam fault recovery, the method may further include: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
- the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
- the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
- the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
- the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection within the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group may be related, this enables the terminal device to perform recovery operations between satellite beams where inter-satellite links can be easily established, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
- the first instruction information, the second instruction information, and the third instruction information mentioned above may be carried in the same message/signaling/information or in different messages/signaling/information; no limitation is made here.
- the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; different RSs within the same group of the K groups of RSs can be correlated, for example, the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
- the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
- the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
- the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
- one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection can be grouped using any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the scheme implementation.
- Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of another implementation of the communication method provided in this application.
- the method includes the following steps.
- the network device sends first visibility information, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first visibility information.
- the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device.
- step S700 is an optional step.
- the implementation process of step S700 can be referred to step S400 and related descriptions above.
- the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information through other means. For example, in step S701, the first terminal device determines the first visibility information through information obtained by its own information acquisition module (e.g., camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.).
- its own information acquisition module e.g., camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.
- steps S700 and S701 can be implemented in one of them, that is, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information based on one of these two steps.
- both steps S700 and S701 can be executed. If the first visibility information received by the first terminal device in step S700 is inconsistent with the first visibility information obtained by the first terminal device in step S701, the first terminal device may arbitrarily discard/ignore one of them, or the first terminal device may discard/ignore one of them based on the instruction of the network device; no limitation is made here.
- the network device sends first configuration information, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first configuration information.
- the first configuration information is used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; and the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection.
- the first terminal device determines a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device.
- This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself.
- the first terminal device can determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region granularity or visibility information at the terminal device granularity (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection). This can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
- the method shown in Figure 7 further includes: the first terminal device receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
- the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs;
- the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS (i.e., the second RS) for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
- the RS i.e., the second RS
- the method shown in Figure 7 further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information, the second indication information indicating that the RS used for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
- the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device;
- the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
- the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery (i.e., the second RS) based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
- the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
- the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
- the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
- the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection within the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group may be related, this enables the terminal device to perform recovery operations between satellite beams where inter-satellite links can be easily established, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
- the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
- the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
- the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
- the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
- This application embodiment provides a communication device 800, which includes a transceiver unit 802 and a processing unit 801.
- the communication device 800 can perform the functions of any communication device (e.g., terminal device or network device) in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
- the communication device 800 can be any communication device in the above method embodiments, or it can be an integrated circuit or component, such as a chip, inside any communication device in the above method embodiments.
- the processing unit 801 when the device 800 is used to execute the method performed by the first terminal device in the aforementioned embodiments, the processing unit 801 is used to acquire first visibility information, which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the processing unit 801 is further used to determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- first visibility information which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the
- the processing unit 801 is used to determine first configuration information; the processing unit 801 is used to determine a first RS, the first RS being used for beam failure detection; wherein, first visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS providing services to the first terminal device, the first RS being an RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration being used for beam recovery before beam failure; wherein, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the transceiver unit 802 is used to transmit the first RS.
- the processing unit 801 is used to acquire first visibility information, which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located in a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located in the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device;
- the transceiver unit 802 is used to receive first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection;
- the processing unit 801 is also used to determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information, wherein the second RS is an RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the processing unit 801 is used to determine first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the transceiver unit 802 is used to transmit the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located in a first geographical area, the terminal device located in the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
- the communication device 900 includes at least an input/output interface 901.
- the communication device 900 can be a chip or an integrated circuit.
- the communication device also includes logic circuitry 902.
- the transceiver unit 802 can be a communication interface, which can be the input/output interface 901 in Figure 9.
- the input/output interface 901 can include an input interface and an output interface.
- the communication interface can also be a transceiver circuit, which can include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
- the logic circuit 902 is used to acquire first visibility information, which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the logic circuit 902 is further used to determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein, the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
- first visibility information which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located
- logic circuit 902 is used to determine first configuration information; logic circuit 902 is used to determine a first RS, the first RS being used for beam failure detection; wherein, first visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS providing services to the first terminal device, the first RS being an RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration being used for beam recovery before beam failure; wherein, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between network devices located within one or more spatial angle intervals and terminal devices located within a first geographical area, the terminal devices located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between network devices located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the input/output interface 901 is used to transmit the first RS.
- the logic circuit 902 is used to acquire first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device;
- the input/output interface 901 is used to receive first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection;
- the logic circuit 902 is further used to determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information, wherein the second RS is an RS used for beam fault recovery.
- the logic circuit 902 is used to determine first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the input/output interface 901 is used to send the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
- the logic circuit 902 and the input/output interface 901 can execute the method executed by any of the communication devices (e.g., terminal devices or network devices) in the aforementioned method embodiments and achieve the corresponding beneficial effects, which will not be elaborated here.
- the communication devices e.g., terminal devices or network devices
- the processing unit 801 shown in FIG8 can be the logic circuit 902 in FIG9.
- the logic circuit 902 can be a processing device, the functions of which can be partially or entirely implemented in software.
- the processing apparatus may include a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor reads and executes the computer program stored in the memory to perform the corresponding processing and/or steps in any of the method embodiments.
- the processing device may consist of only a processor.
- a memory for storing computer programs is located outside the processing device, and the processor is connected to the memory via circuitry/wires to read and execute the computer programs stored in the memory.
- the memory and processor may be integrated together or physically independent of each other.
- the processing device may be one or more chips, or one or more integrated circuits.
- the processing device may be one or more field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), system-on-chips (SoCs), central processing units (CPUs), network processors (NPs), digital signal processors (DSPs), microcontroller units (MCUs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), or other integrated chips, or any combination of the above chips or processors.
- FPGAs field-programmable gate arrays
- ASICs application-specific integrated circuits
- SoCs system-on-chips
- CPUs central processing units
- NPs network processors
- DSPs digital signal processors
- MCUs microcontroller units
- PLDs programmable logic devices
- Figure 10 shows the communication device 1000 involved in the above embodiments provided in the embodiments of this application.
- the communication device 1000 can be the communication device that serves as a terminal device in the above embodiments.
- the present invention provides a possible logical structure diagram of the communication device 1000, which may include, but is not limited to, at least one processor 1001 and a communication interface 1002.
- the device may also include at least one of a memory 1003 and a bus 1004.
- the at least one processor 1001 is used to control the operation of the communication device 1000.
- the processor 1001 can be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field-programmable gate array, or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
- the processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, etc.
- the communication device 1000 shown in Figure 10 can be used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal device in the aforementioned method embodiments and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the terminal device.
- the specific implementation of the communication device shown in Figure 10 can be referred to the description in the aforementioned method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
- Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device involved in the above embodiments provided in the embodiments of this application.
- the communication device can specifically be the network device in the above embodiments, and the structure of the communication device can be referred to the structure shown in Figure 11.
- the communication device includes at least one processor 1111 and at least one network interface 1114.
- the communication device further includes at least one memory 1112, at least one transceiver 1113, and one or more antennas 1115.
- the processor 1111, memory 1112, transceiver 1113, and network interface 1114 are connected, for example, via a bus. In this embodiment, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines, or buses, etc., and this embodiment is not limited thereto.
- the antenna 1115 is connected to the transceiver 1113.
- the network interface 1114 is used to enable the communication device to communicate with other communication devices through a communication link.
- the network interface 1114 may include a network interface between the communication device and core network equipment, such as an S1 interface.
- the network interface may also include a network interface between the communication device and other communication devices (e.g., other network devices or core network equipment), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
- the processor 1111 is primarily used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data from the software programs, for example, to support the actions described in the embodiments of the communication device.
- the communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit (CPU).
- the baseband processor is primarily used to process communication protocols and communication data, while the CPU is primarily used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data from the software programs.
- the processor 1111 in Figure 11 can integrate the functions of both a baseband processor and a CPU. Those skilled in the art will understand that the baseband processor and CPU can also be independent processors interconnected via technologies such as buses.
- a terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, and multiple CPUs to enhance its processing capabilities.
- Various components of the terminal device can be connected via various buses.
- the baseband processor can also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
- the CPU can also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
- the function of processing communication protocols and communication data can be built into the processor or stored in memory as a software program, which is then executed by the processor to implement the baseband processing function.
- the memory is primarily used to store software programs and data.
- the memory 1112 can exist independently or be connected to the processor 1111.
- the memory 1112 can be integrated with the processor 1111, for example, integrated into a single chip.
- the memory 1112 can store program code that executes the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application, and its execution is controlled by the processor 1111.
- the various types of computer program code being executed can also be considered as drivers for the processor 1111.
- Figure 11 shows only one memory and one processor. In actual terminal devices, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories. Memory can also be called storage medium or storage device, etc. Memory can be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, i.e., an on-chip storage element, or it can be a separate storage element; this application does not limit this.
- Transceiver 1113 can be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between a communication device and a terminal. Transceiver 1113 can be connected to antenna 1115. Transceiver 1113 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, one or more antennas 1115 can receive radio frequency signals. The receiver Rx of transceiver 1113 is used to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and provide the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals to processor 1111 so that processor 1111 can perform further processing on the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, such as demodulation and decoding.
- the transmitter Tx in transceiver 1113 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals from processor 1111, convert the modulated digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals into radio frequency signals, and transmit the radio frequency signals through one or more antennas 1115.
- the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of downmixing and analog-to-digital conversion on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency (IF) signal.
- IF digital intermediate frequency
- the order of these downmixing and IF conversion processes is adjustable.
- the transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of upmixing and digital-to-analog conversion on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital IF signal to obtain a radio frequency signal.
- the order of these upmixing and IF conversion processes is also adjustable.
- the digital baseband signal and the digital IF signal can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
- the transceiver 1113 can also be called an interface unit, transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver device, interface module, etc.
- the device in the interface unit that implements the receiving function can be regarded as the receiving unit
- the device in the interface unit that implements the transmitting function can be regarded as the transmitting unit. That is, the interface unit includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
- the receiving unit can also be called a receiver, input port, receiving circuit, etc.
- the transmitting unit can be called a transmitter, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
- the communication device shown in Figure 11 can be used to implement the steps implemented by the network device in the aforementioned method embodiments and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the network device.
- the specific implementation of the communication device shown in Figure 11 can be referred to the descriptions in the aforementioned method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
- This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer-executable instructions.
- the processor When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a computer, the processor performs the method as described in any possible implementation of a communication device (e.g., a terminal device or a network device) in the foregoing method embodiments.
- This application also provides a computer program product (or computer program) including instructions.
- the instructions in the computer program product are executed by a processor, the processor performs a method that may be implemented by any of the communication devices (e.g., terminal devices or network devices) described in the above method embodiments.
- This application also provides a chip system including at least one processor for implementing the functions involved in any possible implementation of the communication device (e.g., terminal device or network device) in the above method embodiments.
- the communication device e.g., terminal device or network device
- the chip system further includes interface circuitry that provides program instructions and/or data to the at least one processor.
- the chip system may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the terminal device.
- the chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.
- the chip system may further include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for any of the communication devices described in the above method embodiments.
- the chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.
- This application also provides a communication system, the network system architecture of which includes the terminal device and network device in any of the above embodiments.
- the disclosed systems, apparatuses, and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the apparatus embodiments described above are illustrative; for instance, the division of units is a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed.
- the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection between apparatuses or units through some interfaces, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate.
- the components shown as units may or may not be physical units; that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
- the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into a processing module, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
- the integrated units can be implemented in hardware or as software functional units. If the integrated unit is implemented as a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- This computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of this application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes various media capable of storing program code, such as USB flash drives, portable hard drives, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks, or optical disks.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2024年05月22日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202410645193.X、申请名称为“一种通信方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 202410645193.X, filed on May 22, 2024, entitled "A Communication Method and Related Device", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及相关装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related apparatus.
无线通信,可以是两个或两个以上的通信节点间不经由导体或缆线传播而进行的传输通讯,该通信节点一般包括网络设备和终端设备。传统的网络设备可以是固定在地面某处的设备,例如地面网络(terrestrial network,TN)小区所属的地面基站。其中,TN小区的波束管理过程(例如判断当前波束是否发生波束失败事件的过程、在多个候选波束中选择目标波束的过程)的依据,为终端设备接收来自网络设备的信号的信号接收强度。Wireless communication can be a transmission communication between two or more communication nodes that does not propagate through conductors or cables. These communication nodes typically include network devices and terminal devices. Traditional network devices can be fixed to a location on the ground, such as the terrestrial base station belonging to a terrestrial network (TN) cell. The beam management process of a TN cell (e.g., determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, and selecting a target beam from multiple candidate beams) is based on the signal reception strength of the signal received by the terminal device from the network device.
随着通信技术的发展,网络设备有可能不会固定在地面某处,例如该网络设备可以为非地面网络(non-terrestrial network,NTN)小区所属的高速移动的设备,包括但不限于低轨道卫星、中轨道卫星以及高轨道卫星等卫星设备。With the development of communication technology, network equipment may not be fixed in a certain place on the ground. For example, the network equipment may be a high-speed mobile device belonging to a non-terrestrial network (NTN) cell, including but not limited to satellite equipment such as low-Earth orbit satellites, medium-Earth orbit satellites, and high-Earth orbit satellites.
然而,不同于TN小区所属的地面基站,由于NTN小区所属的卫星设备有可能存在高速移动,在某个时刻,一个NTN小区的参考信号接收强度较强,并不意味着在后续的一个或多个时刻上,该NTN小区的参考信号接收强度仍能保持较强的水平,这就导致上述TN小区的波束管理过程不再适用。However, unlike the ground base stations to which TN cells belong, the satellite equipment to which NTN cells belong may move at high speeds. At a certain moment, the reference signal reception strength of an NTN cell is strong, but this does not mean that the reference signal reception strength of the NTN cell will remain strong at one or more subsequent moments. This makes the beam management process of TN cells no longer applicable.
本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关设备,用于提升波束管理效率。This application provides a communication method and related equipment for improving beam management efficiency.
本申请第一方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于终端设备,例如,由终端设备执行,或者,该方法由终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者,该方法由实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件执行。为便于说明,本申请以第一终端设备为例进行说明,在该方法中,第一终端设备获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该第一终端设备基于该第一可见性信息,确定第一参考信号(reference signal,RS)对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长;其中,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测(beam failure detection,BFD)的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。This application provides a communication method applicable to a terminal device, for example, executed by the terminal device, or executed by a component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) in the terminal device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the terminal device's functions. For ease of explanation, this application uses a first terminal device as an example. In this method, the first terminal device acquires first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; based on the first visibility information, the first terminal device determines the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to a first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备获取的第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与特定的终端设备之间的通信质量,该特定的终端设备可以包括位于第一地理区域内的任一终端设备,或,该第一终端设备自身。此后,该第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定用于波束失败探测的RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,并且,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定网络设备的剩余服务时长,该服务剩余时长可以用于波束失败恢复。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行波束失败恢复,能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the above scheme, the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device. This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself. Subsequently, the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure detection, and this remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device, and this remaining service duration can be used for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level, which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal obstruction of the network device, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
应理解,一个RS对应的网络设备,可以理解为,提供或发送该RS的网络设备。可选的,该RS的资源可以是该网络设备配置的,也可以是其它网络设备配置的,此处不做限定。It should be understood that the network device corresponding to an RS can be understood as the network device that provides or transmits the RS. Optionally, the resources of the RS can be configured by the network device itself or by other network devices; this is not limited here.
应理解,区域粒度的可见性信息指的是针对一个或多个区域中的每个区域配置的可见性信息,终端设备粒度的可见性信息是针对一个或多个终端设备中的每个终端设备配置的可见性信息。It should be understood that region-level visibility information refers to the visibility information configured for each region in one or more regions, while terminal device-level visibility information refers to the visibility information configured for each terminal device in one or more terminal devices.
需要说明的是,可见性信息,可以指示网络设备与终端设备之间传输的信号的传输路径的遮挡情况,该遮挡情况可以反映出通信质量。其中,由于NTN通信的入射扩散角比较小,导致NTN小区对应的网络设备与位于地面的终端设备之间的信号遮挡情况对信号传输质量的影响比较大。为此,通信装置可以基于可见性信息确定(或选择)与终端设备进行通信的通信质量较高的一个或多个网络设备,以提升通信效率,例如,可通过如下一种或多种示例实现。It should be noted that visibility information indicates the degree of obstruction in the transmission path of signals between network devices and terminal devices, and this obstruction reflects the communication quality. In particular, because NTN communication has a relatively small incident spread angle, signal obstruction between the network device corresponding to the NTN cell and the terminal device located on the ground has a significant impact on signal transmission quality. Therefore, the communication device can use visibility information to determine (or select) one or more network devices with higher communication quality for communication with the terminal device, thereby improving communication efficiency. This can be achieved, for example, through one or more of the following examples.
例如,终端设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,选择未被遮挡(或遮挡较小)的网络设备,可以减少不必要切换、重选,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices can select network devices that are not blocked (or have only minor blockage) based on signal obstruction, which can reduce unnecessary switching and reselection and improve communication efficiency.
又如,终端设备或网络设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,预测信号中断的发生时刻,提前准备/进行切换至通信质量较高的网络设备,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices or network devices can predict the timing of signal interruptions based on signal obstruction and prepare/switch to network devices with higher communication quality in advance to improve communication efficiency.
又如,终端设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,在合理的位置和/或姿态与通信质量较高的网络设备进行通信,能够提高信号传输的成功率,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices can communicate with network devices of higher quality at reasonable locations and/or in appropriate postures based on signal obstruction, which can improve the success rate of signal transmission and thus enhance communication efficiency.
又如,终端设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,选择未被遮挡(或遮挡较小)的网络设备进行定位,能够提升定位精度,并通过较高的定位精度实现相关通信业务,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices can select unobstructed (or less obstructed) network devices for positioning based on signal obstruction, which can improve positioning accuracy and enable related communication services through higher positioning accuracy, thereby improving communication efficiency.
本申请中,可见性信息,可以替换为其它术语,例如NTN通信的可见性信息、遮挡信息、NTN通信的遮挡信息、NTN传输环境信息、长期链路质量信息、或NTN传输路径信息等。In this application, visibility information can be replaced with other terms, such as visibility information of NTN communication, occlusion information, occlusion information of NTN communication, NTN transmission environment information, long-term link quality information, or NTN transmission path information, etc.
示例性的,该可见性信息包括以下任一项:For example, the visibility information includes any of the following:
信息1,指示通信信号的传输路径为可见路径;Information 1 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a visible path;
信息2,指示通信信号的传输路径为不可见路径;Information 2 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is an invisible path;
信息3,指示通信信号的传输路径为视距(line of sight,LOS)路径;或Information 3 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a line-of-sight (LOS) path; or
信息4,指示通信信号的传输路径为非视距(non-line of sight,NLOS)路径。Information 4 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a non-line of sight (NLOS) path.
可选地,一般情况下,两个通信设备之间的通信路径上的遮挡越少,可以认为该两个通信设备之间的通信质量越高;反之,两个通信设备之间的通信路径上的遮挡越多,可以认为该两个通信设备之间的通信质量越低。为此,上述四项指示信息所指示的四个通信质量从高到低的排序可以为:信息1指示的通信质量(或信息2指示的通信质量)、信息3指示的通信质量、信息4指示的通信质量。Optionally, generally speaking, the fewer obstructions on the communication path between two communication devices, the higher the communication quality between them; conversely, the more obstructions on the communication path between two communication devices, the lower the communication quality. Therefore, the order of the four communication qualities indicated by the above four indications from high to low can be: communication quality indicated by information 1 (or communication quality indicated by information 2), communication quality indicated by information 3, and communication quality indicated by information 4.
可选地,可见性信息指示的通信质量可以是预期的、期望的、或预测的通信质量。即可见性信息用于指示位于该空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于该地理区域内的终端设备之间的预期的、期望的、或预测的通信质量。Optionally, the communication quality indicated by the visibility information can be the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality. That is, the visibility information is used to indicate the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality between network devices located within that spatial angular range and terminal devices located within that geographical area.
可选的,第一终端设备可以通过多种方式获取第一可见性信息。例如,第一终端设备可以基于其它设备(例如终端设备、网络设备等)的指示以获得第一可见性信息,能够降低实现复杂度。又如,第一终端设备通过自身的信息采集模块(例如摄像头、麦克风、天线、雷达、传感器等)得到的信息确定该第一可见性信息。Optionally, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information in various ways. For example, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information based on instructions from other devices (such as terminal devices, network devices, etc.), which can reduce implementation complexity. Alternatively, the first terminal device can determine the first visibility information through information obtained by its own information acquisition module (such as a camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.).
可选的,可见性信息可以携带区域的标识或终端设备的标识。例如,第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备的情况下,该第一可见性信息可以包括第一地理区域的标识;在这种情况下,可见性信息可以理解为区域粒度的可见性信息。又如,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量的情况下,该第一可见性信息可以包括第一终端设备的标识;在这种情况下,可见性信息可以理解为终端设备粒度的可见性信息。Optionally, visibility information may carry an identifier of a region or an identifier of a terminal device. For example, if the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical region, and the terminal device located within the first geographical region includes the first terminal device, then the first visibility information may include an identifier of the first geographical region; in this case, the visibility information can be understood as region-level visibility information. As another example, if the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device, then the first visibility information may include an identifier of the first terminal device; in this case, the visibility information can be understood as terminal device-level visibility information.
需要说明的是,网络设备向某个终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,可以理解为,当前时刻与该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻之间的时间间隔,或,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的起始时刻与该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻之间的时间间隔,或,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻与最迟启动测量的时刻之间的时间间隔。It should be noted that the remaining service duration of a network device providing services to a terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the current time and the time when the network device stops providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the start time and the end time of the network device providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the end time and the latest time when the measurement was started.
可选的,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻,也可以理解为,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的截止时刻,即该网络设备将会在该截止时刻停止(或暂停)为该终端设备提供的服务。Optionally, the termination time of the network device's service to the terminal device can also be understood as the cutoff time of the network device's service to the terminal device, that is, the network device will stop (or suspend) the service provided to the terminal device at the cutoff time.
可选的,剩余服务时长可以替换为其它术语,例如,剩余可服务时长、剩余可用时长、剩余通信时长、或剩余可通信时长等。Optionally, the remaining service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as remaining serviceable duration, remaining available duration, remaining communication duration, or remaining communication duration.
在上述方案中,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,可以理解为,可见性信息可以用于确定剩余服务时长。In the above scheme, the first terminal device can determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. It can be understood that the visibility information can be used to determine the remaining service duration.
例如,第一可见性信息可以用于选择/确定第一时间段,其中,该第一时间段可以包含可见的一个或多个时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量优于阈值的一个或多个时间段(即排除第二时间段,该第二时间段可以包含不可见的时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量较差的时间段)。此外,在该第一时间段中,从当前时刻开始,满足下述一个或多个条件的时间段的总时长可以为剩余服务时长:For example, first visibility information can be used to select/determine a first time period, wherein the first time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods indicated by the visibility information with communication quality better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a second time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods indicated by the visibility information with poor communication quality). Furthermore, within this first time period, the total duration of time periods satisfying one or more of the following conditions, starting from the current time, can be the remaining service duration:
条件1.预期的仰角大于仰角阈值的时长;Condition 1. The duration during which the expected elevation angle is greater than the elevation angle threshold;
条件2.预期的信号接收强度大于阈值的时长;Condition 2. The duration for which the expected signal reception strength is greater than the threshold;
条件3.预期的信道传输的损耗(该损耗可以根据终端设备与网络设备之间的相对位置、距离、频点等参数确定)小于阈值的时长。Condition 3. The expected channel transmission loss (which can be determined based on parameters such as the relative position, distance, and frequency between the terminal device and the network device) is less than the threshold for a certain duration.
可以理解的是,上述条件1至条件3的涉及的参数(例如预期的仰角、预期的信号接收强度、预期的信道传输的损耗等)可以依据网络设备的星历信息确定。在满足上述一个或多个条件的时间段中,网络设备可以为终端设备提供服务(或提供较优的服务),相应的,网络设备为终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长可以基于上述一个或多个条件确定。It is understood that the parameters involved in conditions 1 to 3 above (such as the expected elevation angle, expected signal reception strength, expected channel transmission loss, etc.) can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the network device. During the time period in which one or more of the above conditions are met, the network device can provide services (or provide better services) to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the remaining service duration for the network device to provide services to the terminal device can be determined based on one or more of the above conditions.
需要说明的是,剩余服务时长用于在波束失败前的波束恢复,可以理解为:剩余服务时长用于在波束失败前的抢先恢复,或者,可以理解为,剩余服务时长可以用于判断当前波束(即第一RS对应的波束)是否即将发生波束失败,或者,剩余服务时长可以为该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻之前的一段时长。换言之,剩余服务时长用于波束失败恢复,可以替换为,剩余服务时长用于波束失败判决、用于确定波束是否即将失败,用于触发波束失败恢复,或,用于确定是否发生波束失败事件等。It should be noted that the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. This can be understood as: the remaining service duration is used for preemptive recovery before beam failure; or, it can be understood as: the remaining service duration can be used to determine whether the current beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the first RS) is about to fail; or, the remaining service duration can be a period of time before the network device terminates its service to the terminal device. In other words, the remaining service duration for beam failure recovery can be replaced by: the remaining service duration being used for beam failure determination, determining whether a beam is about to fail, triggering beam failure recovery, or determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, etc.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该第一RS。In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second configuration information, the second configuration information being used to configure the first RS.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的配置,接收用于波束失败探测的第一RS,使得终端设备能够基于网络设备的配置实现波束失败探测的过程。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can receive the first RS for beam failure detection based on the configuration of the network device, so that the terminal device can realize the beam failure detection process based on the configuration of the network device.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收用于指示第一阈值的指示信息;其中,该剩余服务时长和该第一阈值用于波束失败恢复。In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving indication information for indicating a first threshold; wherein the remaining service duration and the first threshold are used for beam failure recovery.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以接收用于指示第一阈值的指示信息,使得该第一终端设备可以基于该剩余服务时长和该第一阈值执行波束失败恢复。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can receive indication information for indicating the first threshold, so that the first terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on the remaining service time and the first threshold.
可选的,第一阈值可以是标准/协议预配置的。Optionally, the first threshold can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在该剩余服务时长低于或等于该第一阈值的情况下,该第一终端设备发送波束恢复请求信息。In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: if the remaining service duration is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first terminal device sends a beam recovery request message.
基于上述方案,在该剩余服务时长低于或等于该第一阈值的情况下,第一终端设备可以确定第一RS对应的波束即将或已经发生波束失败(或第一RS对应的网络设备向第一终端设备提供的服务即将或已经发生中断),为此,第一终端设备可以发送波束恢复请求信息,以通过波束恢复请求信息实现通信波束的恢复。Based on the above scheme, if the remaining service time is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first terminal device can determine that the beam corresponding to the first RS is about to fail or has already failed (or the service provided by the network device corresponding to the first RS to the first terminal device is about to fail or has already failed). To this end, the first terminal device can send a beam recovery request message to restore the communication beam.
可选的,波束恢复请求信息可以包括终端设备在波束失败恢复(beam failure recovery,BFR)流程发送的信息,例如链路恢复请求(link recovery request,LRR)、发送指示BFR的介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)控制单元(control element,CE)、或随机接入请求。Optionally, the beam recovery request information may include information sent by the terminal device during the beam failure recovery (BFR) process, such as a link recovery request (LRR), a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE) sending an indication of BFR, or a random access request.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测(candidate beam detection,CBD);其中,该波束恢复请求信息关联于第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第二RS是基于该第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定的RS。In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first configuration information, the first configuration information being used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection (CBD); wherein the beam recovery request information is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the second RS being an RS determined from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备还可以接收用于配置候选波束检测的L个RS的第一配置信息,并且,该第一终端设备可以基于第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定第二RS。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can also receive first configuration information for configuring L RSs for candidate beam detection, and the first terminal device can determine a second RS from the L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, and improve beam management efficiency.
应理解,波束恢复请求信息关联于第二RS,可以理解为,第二RS用于确定波束恢复请求信息。例如,终端设备可以基于第二RS发送波束恢复请求信息。It should be understood that the beam recovery request information is associated with the second RS, which can be understood as the second RS being used to determine the beam recovery request information. For example, the terminal device can send the beam recovery request information based on the second RS.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示用于波束故障恢复的RS满足第一条件,该第一条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
可选的,第一条件可以是标准/协议预配置的。Optionally, the first condition can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
可选的,第一指示信息与第一配置信息可以承载于同一消息/信令,或者,第一指示信息与后文描述的第二配置信息可以承载于同一消息/信令。Optionally, the first indication information and the first configuration information may be carried in the same message/signaling, or the first indication information and the second configuration information described below may be carried in the same message/signaling.
需要说明的是,可服务时长可以是基于第一可见性信息确定的。例如,对于第一终端设备而言,网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的可服务时长,可以理解为,第一可见性信息指示该网络设备相对该第一终端设备是可见的(或第一可见性信息指示该网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的通信质量优于阈值)的过程中,起始时刻与终止时刻时间的时间间隔。It should be noted that the service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information. For example, for a first terminal device, the service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the start and end times during the process in which the first visibility information indicates that the network device is visible to the first terminal device (or the first visibility information indicates that the communication quality of the network device providing services to the first terminal device is better than a threshold).
相应的,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定一个RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的可服务时长。例如,第一可见性信息可以用于选择/确定第三时间段,其中,该第三时间段可以包含可见的一个或多个时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量优于阈值的一个或多个时间段(即排除第四时间段,该第四时间段可以包含不可见的时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量较差的时间段)。此外,在该第三时间段中,满足一个或多个条件的时间段的总时长可以为可服务时长,该一个或多个条件可以包括上文描述的条件1至条件3中的一项或多项。Accordingly, the first terminal device can determine the serviceable duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. For example, the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a third time period, wherein the third time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a fourth time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is poor). In addition, within the third time period, the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the serviceable duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
可选的,可服务时长可以替换为其它术语,例如,有效服务时间、有效服务时长、有效可通信时长、或有效通信时长等。Optionally, service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as effective service time, effective service duration, effective communication duration, or effective communication duration.
类似地,过顶累计服务时长可以是基于第一可见性信息确定的。例如,对于第一终端设备而言,网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的过顶累计服务时长,可以理解为,第一可见性信息指示该网络设备相对该第一终端设备处于过顶的过程中,包含的一个或多个时间段(可选的,不同时间段可以是不连续的)的总时长。Similarly, the cumulative overpass service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information. For example, for a first terminal device, the cumulative overpass service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the total duration of one or more time periods (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous) included in the process of the network device being overpassed relative to the first terminal device, as indicated by the first visibility information.
相应的,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定一个RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的过顶累计服务时长。例如,第一可见性信息可以用于选择/确定第五时间段,其中,该第五时间段可以包含网络设备相对该第一终端设备处于过顶的过程中的第五时间段,该第五时间段包含的一个或多个时间段(可选的,不同时间段可以是不连续的)的总时长。此外,在该第五时间段中,满足一个或多个条件的时间段的总时长可以为过顶累计服务时长,该一个或多个条件可以包括上文描述的条件1至条件3中的一项或多项。Accordingly, the first terminal device can determine the cumulative overpass service duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. For example, the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a fifth time period, wherein the fifth time period can include a fifth time period in which the network device is in the process of overpassing relative to the first terminal device, and the total duration of one or more time periods included in the fifth time period (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous). In addition, within the fifth time period, the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the cumulative overpass service duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
可选的,过顶累计服务时长可以替换为其它术语,例如,过顶累计服务时间、过顶累计有效服务时长、过顶累计通信时长或过顶累计可通信时长等。Optionally, the cumulative service duration over the top can be replaced with other terms, such as cumulative service time over the top, cumulative effective service duration over the top, cumulative communication duration over the top, or cumulative communicable duration over the top.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息指示用于波束失败恢复的RS满足第二条件,该第二条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information, the second indication information indicating that the RS for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备位于该第一终端设备的过顶的空间角度区域时的预期信号强度大于或等于阈值;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS的信号强度大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定预期信号强度较强的RS作为用于波束故障恢复的RS,能够提升基于该用于波束故障恢复的RS进行通信的通信质量。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
需要说明的是,预期信号强度可以是基于第一可见性信息确定的。例如,对于第一终端设备而言,网络设备向该第一终端设备发送的信号的预期信号强度,可以理解为,该网络设备在未来的某个时刻(或某个时间段)向该终端设备发送的信号的预期的信号强度,或,终端设备在未来的某个时刻接收到的信号的强度。It should be noted that the expected signal strength can be determined based on the first visibility information. For example, for a first terminal device, the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the first terminal device can be understood as the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the terminal device at a certain time in the future (or a certain time period), or the strength of the signal received by the terminal device at a certain time in the future.
示例性的,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定某个网络设备与该第一终端设备之间,在未来的某个时刻(或某个时间段)是可见的(或,第一可见性信息指示的通信质量优于阈值)。此外,该第一终端设备可以接收该网络设备在当前时刻(或历史时刻)的信号的第一信号强度,相应的,该第一终端设备可以基于该第一信号强度预测该网络设备在上述未来的某个时刻(或某个时间段)的第二信号强度,即该第二信号强度为预期的信号强度。For example, the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, that a network device and the first terminal device will be visible to each other at a future time (or a certain time period) (or, the communication quality indicated by the first visibility information is better than a threshold). Furthermore, the first terminal device can receive a first signal strength of the network device's signal at the current time (or a historical time), and correspondingly, the first terminal device can predict a second signal strength of the network device at the aforementioned future time (or a certain time period) based on the first signal strength, i.e., the second signal strength is the expected signal strength.
可选的,第一终端设备基于第一信号强度进行预测得到第二信号强度的过程中,预测的依据可以包括上述第一可见性信息、网络设备与第一终端设备之间的路损变化信息(例如通过网络设备与第一终端设备之间的相对位置确定)、网络设备所处卫星的等效全向辐射功率(equivalent isotropically radiated power,EIRP)信息等。Optionally, in the process of the first terminal device predicting the second signal strength based on the first signal strength, the basis for the prediction may include the aforementioned first visibility information, the path loss change information between the network device and the first terminal device (e.g., determined by the relative position between the network device and the first terminal device), the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) information of the satellite where the network device is located, etc.
可选的,上述信号强度,可以为参考信号接收强度(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)。Optionally, the above signal strength can be the reference signal receiving power (RSRP).
可选的,上述信号强度,可以替换为其它用于表征信号接收质量的参数,例如参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)。Optionally, the signal strength mentioned above can be replaced with other parameters used to characterize signal reception quality, such as reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ).
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,用于候选波束探测的L个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示以下至少一项:In one possible implementation of the first aspect, the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
在该K组RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS为同一组内的不同RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In this group of K RSs, the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
在该K组RS中,在与用于波束失败探测的RS位于同一组内的其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS分别为不同组的RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;或In the K groups of RSs, if the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to other RSs in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection is less than the threshold, then the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
在该K组RS中,任一RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS为可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长最长的网络设备对应的RS。In the K groups of RSs, if the available service time or the cumulative available service time of the network device corresponding to any RS is less than the threshold, the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,优先在与用于波束失败探测的RS相同组内的用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS,由于同一组内的不同RS对应的不同网络设备可能是具备关联关系的,通过这种方式,使能终端设备尽量在容易建立星间链的卫星波束间进行恢复操作,减少星间交互开销。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
可选的,该用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该K组RS中同一组内的不同RS可以是具备关联关系的,例如,该K组RS满足以下任一项:Optionally, the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; different RSs within the same group of the K groups of RSs can be correlated, for example, the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨道是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨道是不同的;Within these K groups of RSs, the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是不同的;或Within these K groups of RSs, the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备之间的距离小于阈值,不同组的RS对应的网络设备之间的距离大于阈值。In the K groups of RS, the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
本申请第二方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于网络设备,例如,由网络设备执行,或者,该方法由网络设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者,该方法由实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件执行。为便于说明,本申请以网络设备为例进行说明,在该方法中,网络设备确定第一RS,该第一RS用于波束失败探测;其中,第一可见性信息用于确定该第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复;其中,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该网络设备发送该第一RS。A second aspect of this application provides a communication method applicable to a network device, for example, executed by the network device, or executed by a component (e.g., processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) of the network device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the functions of the network device. For ease of explanation, this application uses a network device as an example. In this method, the network device determines a first RS (Signal Range), which is used for beam failure detection; wherein, first visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device, the first RS being the RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration being used for beam recovery before beam failure; wherein, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the network device transmits the first RS.
基于上述方案,第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与特定的终端设备之间的通信质量,该特定的终端设备可以包括位于第一地理区域内的任一终端设备,或,该第一终端设备自身。此外,该网络设备发送于波束失败探测的第一RS之后,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,并且,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定网络设备的剩余服务时长,该服务剩余时长可以用于波束失败恢复。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行波束失败恢复,能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the above scheme, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device. The specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself. Furthermore, after the network device sends the first RS (Real Signal) following beam failure detection, the first terminal device can determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide service to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. This remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device, which can be used for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level, avoiding or reducing the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal obstruction of the network device, thus improving beam management efficiency.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该第一RS。In one possible implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending second configuration information for configuring the first RS.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的配置,接收用于波束失败探测的第一RS,使得终端设备能够基于网络设备的配置实现波束失败探测的过程。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can receive the first RS for beam failure detection based on the configuration of the network device, so that the terminal device can realize the beam failure detection process based on the configuration of the network device.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送用于指示第一阈值的指示信息;其中,该剩余服务时长和该第一阈值用于波束失败恢复。In one possible implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending indication information for indicating a first threshold; wherein the remaining service duration and the first threshold are used for beam failure recovery.
基于上述方案,网络设备可以向第一终端设备发送用于指示第一阈值的指示信息,使得该第一终端设备可以基于该剩余服务时长和该第一阈值执行波束失败恢复。Based on the above scheme, the network device can send indication information to the first terminal device to indicate the first threshold, so that the first terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on the remaining service time and the first threshold.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;其中,该波束失败恢复对应的波束恢复请求信息关联于第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第二RS是基于该第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定的RS。In one possible implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending first configuration information for configuring L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; wherein the beam recovery request information corresponding to the beam failure recovery is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam failure recovery; the second RS is an RS determined among the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
基于上述方案,网络设备还可以向第一终端设备发送用于配置候选波束检测的L个RS的第一配置信息,并且,该第一终端设备可以基于第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定第二RS。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the above scheme, the network device can also send first configuration information for configuring L RSs for candidate beam detection to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device can determine a second RS from the L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of the network device, and improve beam management efficiency.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示用于波束故障恢复的RS满足第一条件,该第一条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息指示用于波束失败恢复的RS满足第二条件,该第二条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending second indication information indicating that the RS used for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备位于该第一终端设备的过顶的空间角度区域时的预期信号强度大于或等于阈值;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS的信号强度大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定预期信号强度较强的RS作为用于波束故障恢复的RS,能够提升基于该用于波束故障恢复的RS进行通信的通信质量。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,用于候选波束探测的L个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示以下至少一项:In one possible implementation of the second aspect, the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the network device sending third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
在该K组RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS为同一组内的不同RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In this group of K RSs, the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
在该K组RS中,在与用于波束失败探测的RS位于同一组内的其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS分别为不同组的RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;或In the K groups of RSs, if the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to other RSs in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection is less than the threshold, then the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
在该K组RS中,任一RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS为可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长最长的网络设备对应的RS。In the K groups of RSs, if the available service time or the cumulative available service time of the network device corresponding to any RS is less than the threshold, the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,优先在与用于波束失败探测的RS相同组内的用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS,由于同一组内的不同RS对应的不同网络设备可能是具备关联关系的,通过这种方式,使能终端设备尽量在容易建立星间链的卫星波束间进行恢复操作,减少星间交互开销。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
可选的,该用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该K组RS满足以下任一项:Optionally, the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨道是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨道是不同的;Within these K groups of RSs, the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是不同的;或Within these K groups of RSs, the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备之间的距离小于阈值,不同组的RS对应的网络设备之间的距离大于阈值。In the K groups of RS, the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
本申请第三方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于终端设备,例如,由终端设备执行,或者,该方法由终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者,该方法由实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件执行。为便于说明,本申请以第一终端设备为例进行说明,在该方法中,第一终端设备获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该第一终端设备接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该第一终端设备基于该第一可见性信息,在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS。A third aspect of this application provides a communication method applicable to a terminal device, for example, executed by the terminal device, or executed by a component (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) in the terminal device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device. For ease of explanation, this application uses a first terminal device as an example. In this method, the first terminal device acquires first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the first terminal device receives first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; based on the first visibility information, the first terminal device determines a second RS from the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备获取的第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与特定的终端设备之间的通信质量,该特定的终端设备可以包括位于第一地理区域内的任一终端设备,或,该第一终端设备自身。此后,该第一终端设备可以基于第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定第二RS。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the above scheme, the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device. This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself. Subsequently, the first terminal device can determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示用于波束故障恢复的RS满足第一条件,该第一条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the third aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息指示用于波束失败恢复的RS满足第二条件,该第二条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the third aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information, the second indication information indicating that the RS for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备位于该第一终端设备的过顶的空间角度区域时的预期信号强度大于或等于阈值;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS的信号强度大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定预期信号强度较强的RS作为用于波束故障恢复的RS,能够提升基于该用于波束故障恢复的RS进行通信的通信质量。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,用于候选波束探测的L个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示以下至少一项:In one possible implementation of the third aspect, the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
在该K组RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS为同一组内的不同RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In this group of K RSs, the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
在该K组RS中,在与用于波束失败探测的RS位于同一组内的其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS分别为不同组的RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;或In the K groups of RSs, if the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to other RSs in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection is less than the threshold, then the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
在该K组RS中,任一RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS为可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长最长的网络设备对应的RS。In the K groups of RSs, if the available service time or the cumulative available service time of the network device corresponding to any RS is less than the threshold, the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,优先在与用于波束失败探测的RS相同组内的用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS,由于同一组内的不同RS对应的不同网络设备可能是具备关联关系的,通过这种方式,使能终端设备尽量在容易建立星间链的卫星波束间进行恢复操作,减少星间交互开销。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
可选的,该用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该K组RS满足以下任一项:Optionally, the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨道是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨道是不同的;Within these K groups of RSs, the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是不同的;或Within these K groups of RSs, the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备之间的距离小于阈值,不同组的RS对应的网络设备之间的距离大于阈值。In the K groups of RS, the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
本申请第四方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于网络设备,例如,由网络设备执行,或者,该方法由网络设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者,该方法由实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件执行。为便于说明,本申请以网络设备为例进行说明,在该方法中,网络设备确定第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该网络设备发送该第一配置信息;其中,第一可见性信息用于在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量。A fourth aspect of this application provides a communication method applicable to a network device, for example, executed by the network device, or executed by a component (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system) of the network device, or executed by a logic module or software implementing all or part of the functions of the network device. For ease of explanation, this application uses a network device as an example. In this method, the network device determines first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the network device transmits the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
基于上述方案,第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与特定的终端设备之间的通信质量,该特定的终端设备可以包括位于第一地理区域内的任一终端设备,或,该第一终端设备自身。此外,网络设备发送用于候选波束检测的L个RS之后,该第一终端设备可以基于第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定第二RS。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the above scheme, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device. This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself. Furthermore, after the network device sends L RSs for candidate beam detection, the first terminal device can determine a second RS from among these L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on the visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of the network device, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示用于波束故障恢复的RS满足第一条件,该第一条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息指示用于波束失败恢复的RS满足第二条件,该第二条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending second indication information indicating that the RS used for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备位于该第一终端设备的过顶的空间角度区域时的预期信号强度大于或等于阈值;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS的信号强度大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定预期信号强度较强的RS作为用于波束故障恢复的RS,能够提升基于该用于波束故障恢复的RS进行通信的通信质量。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,用于候选波束探测的L个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示以下至少一项:In one possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the network device sending third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
在该K组RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS为同一组内的不同RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In this group of K RSs, the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
在该K组RS中,在与用于波束失败探测的RS位于同一组内的其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS分别为不同组的RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;或In the K groups of RSs, if the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to other RSs in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection is less than the threshold, then the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
在该K组RS中,任一RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS为可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长最长的网络设备对应的RS。In the K groups of RSs, if the available service time or the cumulative available service time of the network device corresponding to any RS is less than the threshold, the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
基于上述方案,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,优先在与用于波束失败探测的RS相同组内的用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS,由于同一组内的不同RS对应的不同网络设备可能是具备关联关系的,通过这种方式,使能终端设备尽量在容易建立星间链的卫星波束间进行恢复操作,减少星间交互开销。Based on the above scheme, the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs in the same group may be related, in this way, the terminal device is enabled to perform recovery operations between satellite beams that are easy to establish inter-satellite links, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
可选的,该用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该K组RS满足以下任一项:Optionally, the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨道是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨道是不同的;Within these K groups of RSs, the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是不同的;或Within these K groups of RSs, the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备之间的距离小于阈值,不同组的RS对应的网络设备之间的距离大于阈值。In the K groups of RS, the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
本申请第五方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,或者,该装置为终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第五方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为终端设备执行为例进行描述。The fifth aspect of this application provides a communication device, which is a terminal device, or a component of a terminal device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device. In this fifth aspect and its possible implementations, the example of the communication device being executed by a terminal device will be used for illustration.
该装置包括处理单元;该处理单元用于获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该处理单元还用于基于该第一可见性信息,确定第一参考信号(reference signal,RS)对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长;其中,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测(beam failure detection,BFD)的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。The device includes a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to acquire first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the processing unit is further configured to determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to a first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
本申请第五方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第一方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第一方面,此处不再赘述。In the fifth aspect of this application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the first aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
本申请第六方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络设备,或者,该装置为网络设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第六方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为网络设备执行为例进行描述。The sixth aspect of this application provides a communication device that is a network device, or a component of a network device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of a network device. In the sixth aspect and its possible implementations, the example of the communication device being a network device is described.
该装置包括处理单元和收发单元;该处理单元用于确定第一RS,该第一RS用于波束失败探测;其中,第一可见性信息用于确定该第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复;其中,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该收发单元用于发送该第一RS。The device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit. The processing unit is used to determine a first RS (Real Signal), which is used for beam failure detection. First visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device. The first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. The first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, where the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device. Alternatively, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device. The transceiver unit is used to transmit the first RS.
本申请第六方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第二方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第二方面,此处不再赘述。In the sixth aspect of this application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the second aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
本申请第七方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,或者,该装置为终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第七方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为终端设备执行为例进行描述。The seventh aspect of this application provides a communication device, which is a terminal device, or a component of a terminal device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of the terminal device. In the seventh aspect and its possible implementations, the example of the communication device being executed by a terminal device is described.
该装置包括处理单元和收发单元;该处理单元用于获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该收发单元用于接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该处理单元还用于基于该第一可见性信息,在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS。The device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit. The processing unit is configured to acquire first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device. The transceiver unit is configured to receive first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection. The processing unit is further configured to determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information, wherein the second RS is an RS used for beam fault recovery.
本申请第七方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第三方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第三方面,此处不再赘述。In the seventh aspect of this application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the third aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the third aspect, which will not be repeated here.
本申请第八方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络设备,或者,该装置为网络设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、电路、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第八方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为网络设备执行为例进行描述。The eighth aspect of this application provides a communication device that is a network device, or a component of a network device (e.g., a processor, circuit, chip, or chip system), or a logic module or software capable of implementing all or part of the functions of a network device. In the eighth aspect and its possible implementations, the example of the communication device being a network device is described.
该装置包括处理单元和收发单元;该处理单元用于确定第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,L为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该收发单元用于发送该第一配置信息;其中,第一可见性信息用于在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量。The device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit; the processing unit is used to determine first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the transceiver unit is used to transmit the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
本申请第八方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第四方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第四方面,此处不再赘述。In the eighth aspect of this application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to perform the steps executed in various possible implementations of the fourth aspect and achieve the corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the fourth aspect, which will not be repeated here.
本申请第九方面提供了一种通信装置,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器与至少一个存储器耦合;该至少一个存储器用于存储程序或指令;该至少一个处理器用于执行该程序或指令,以使该装置实现前述第一方面至第四方面任一方面中的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。The ninth aspect of this application provides a communication device including at least one processor coupled to at least one memory; the at least one memory is used to store a program or instructions; the at least one processor is used to execute the program or instructions to enable the device to implement the method described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects.
本申请第十方面提供了一种通信装置,包括至少一个逻辑电路和输入输出接口;该逻辑电路用于执行如前述第一方面至第四方面任一方面中的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。The tenth aspect of this application provides a communication device including at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface; the logic circuit is used to perform the method described in any of the possible implementations of the first to fourth aspects described above.
本申请第十一方面提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述终端设备以及网络设备。The eleventh aspect of this application provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned terminal equipment and network equipment.
本申请第十二方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该存储介质用于存储一个或多个计算机执行指令,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如上述第一方面至第四方面中任一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。The twelfth aspect of this application provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by a processor, perform the method as described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects described above.
本申请第十三方面提供一种计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),当计算机程序产品中的计算机程序被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述第一方面至第四方面中任一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。The thirteenth aspect of this application provides a computer program product (or computer program) that, when executed by a processor, performs the method described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects described above.
本申请第十四方面提供了一种芯片或芯片系统,该芯片或芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述第一方面至第四方面中任一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。The fourteenth aspect of this application provides a chip or chip system including at least one processor for supporting a communication device in implementing the method described in any possible implementation of any of the first to fourth aspects.
在一种可能的设计中,该芯片或芯片系统还可以包括至少一个存储器,至少一个存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片或芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。可选的,所述芯片或芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。In one possible design, the chip or chip system may further include at least one memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the communication device. The chip or chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete devices. Optionally, the chip or chip system may also include interface circuitry that provides program instructions and/or data to the at least one processor.
其中,第五方面至第十四方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面至第四方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。The technical effects of any of the design methods in aspects five through fourteen can be found in the technical effects of the different design methods in aspects one through four above, and will not be repeated here.
图1为本申请提供的通信系统的一个示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the communication system provided in this application;
图2a至图2d为本申请提供的卫星通信过程的一些示意图;Figures 2a to 2d are some schematic diagrams of the satellite communication process provided in this application;
图3为本申请提供的5G系统中的卫星通信过程的一个示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the satellite communication process in the 5G system provided in this application;
图4为本申请提供的通信方法的一个示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of the communication method provided in this application;
图5和图6为本申请提供的通信方法的应用的一些示意图;Figures 5 and 6 are schematic diagrams illustrating some applications of the communication method provided in this application;
图7为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;Figure 7 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided in this application;
图8至图11为本申请提供的通信装置的一些示意图。Figures 8 to 11 are some schematic diagrams of the communication device provided in this application.
首先,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。First, some terms used in the embodiments of this application will be explained to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.
(1)终端设备:可以是能够接收网络设备调度和指示信息的无线终端设备,无线终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,或具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。(1) Terminal device: can be a wireless terminal device that can receive network device scheduling and instruction information. The wireless terminal device can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
终端设备可以是各种具有无线通信功能的通讯套件(communication kit,套件可以包含例如天线、供电模板、线缆以及Wi-Fi模块等),终端设备还可以是具有卫星通信功能的通讯模组、卫星电话或其组件、甚小口径天线终端(very small aperture terminal,VSAT)。终端设备可以是移动终端设备,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话,手机(mobile phone))、计算机和数据卡,例如,可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑等设备。无线终端设备也可以称为系统、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户站(subscriber station,SS)、用户端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE)、终端(terminal)、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、无人机等。终端设备也可以是可穿戴设备以及下一代通信系统,例如,6G通信系统中的终端设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。当然,本申请中的终端设备还可以指设备中主要负责相关通讯功能的芯片、调制解调器、系统级芯片(system on a chip,SoC)或者可以包含射频(radio frequency,RF)部分等的通讯平台。Terminal devices can be various communication kits with wireless communication capabilities (kits may include, for example, antennas, power supply modules, cables, and Wi-Fi modules). Terminal devices can also be communication modules with satellite communication capabilities, satellite phones or components thereof, and very small aperture terminals (VSATs). Terminal devices can be mobile terminal devices, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers, and data cards. For example, they can be portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-embedded, or vehicle-mounted mobile devices that exchange voice and/or data with a wireless access network. Examples include personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), tablets, and computers with wireless transceiver capabilities. Wireless terminal equipment can also be referred to as a system, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station (MS), remote station, access point (AP), remote terminal, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, subscriber station (SS), customer premises equipment (CPE), terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile terminal (MT), drone, etc. Terminal equipment can also be wearable devices and next-generation communication systems, such as terminal equipment in 6G communication systems or terminal equipment in future public land mobile networks (PLMNs). Of course, the terminal device in this application may also refer to a chip, modem, system-on-a-chip (SoC) or communication platform that may include radio frequency (RF) components, etc., that is mainly responsible for related communication functions.
(2)网络设备:可以是无线网络中的设备,例如网络设备可以为将终端设备接入到无线网络的RAN节点(或设备),又可以称为基站。目前,一些RAN设备的举例为:基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、5G通信系统中的基站gNB(gNodeB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved Node B,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)接入点AP等。另外,在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。(2) Network equipment: This can be equipment in a wireless network. For example, network equipment can be a RAN node (or device) that connects terminal devices to the wireless network, and can also be called a base station. Currently, some examples of RAN equipment include: base station, evolved NodeB (eNodeB), gNB (gNodeB) in 5G communication systems, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), home base station (e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) access point (AP), etc. In addition, in a network structure, network equipment can include centralized unit (CU) nodes, distributed unit (DU) nodes, or RAN equipment including CU nodes and DU nodes.
可选的,RAN节点还可以是宏基站、微基站或室内站、中继节点或施主节点、或者是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器。RAN节点还可以是服务器,可穿戴设备,车辆或车载设备等。例如,车辆外联(vehicle to everything,V2X)技术中的接入网设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。Optionally, RAN nodes can also be macro base stations, micro base stations or indoor stations, relay nodes or donor nodes, or radio controllers in cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenarios. RAN nodes can also be servers, wearable devices, vehicles, or in-vehicle equipment. For example, the access network equipment in vehicle-to-everything (V2X) technology can be a roadside unit (RSU).
在另一种可能的场景中,由多个RAN节点协作协助终端实现无线接入,不同RAN节点分别实现基站的部分功能。例如,RAN节点可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。In another possible scenario, multiple RAN nodes collaborate to assist the terminal in achieving wireless access, with each RAN node performing a portion of the base station's functions. For example, RAN nodes can be central units (CUs), distributed units (DUs), CU-control plane (CPs), CU-user plane (UPs), or radio units (RUs). CUs and DUs can be separate entities or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU). RUs can be included in radio frequency equipment or radio frequency units, such as remote radio units (RRUs), active antenna units (AAUs), or remote radio heads (RRHs).
在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在开放式接入网(open RAN,O-RAN或ORAN)系统中,CU也可以称为O-CU(开放式CU),DU也可以称为O-DU,CU-CP也可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP也可以称为O-CU-UP,RU也可以称为O-RU。为描述方便,本申请中以CU,CU-CP,CU-UP、DU和RU为例进行描述。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU, or RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning. For example, in an open access network (open RAN, O-RAN, or ORAN) system, CU can also be called O-CU (open CU), DU can also be called O-DU, CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP, and RU can also be called O-RU. For ease of description, this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and RU as examples. Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software modules and hardware modules.
接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构。该协议层可以包括控制面协议层和用户面协议层。控制面协议层可以包括以下至少一项:无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层、或物理(physical,PHY)层等。用户面协议层可以包括以下至少一项:业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、或物理层等。Communication between access network devices and terminal devices follows a specific protocol layer structure. This protocol layer may include a control plane protocol layer and a user plane protocol layer. The control plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: radio resource control (RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, or physical (PHY) layer, etc. The user plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, or physical layer, etc.
对于ORAN系统中的网元及其可实现的协议层功能对应关系,可参照下表1。The correspondence between network elements and their achievable protocol layer functions in the ORAN system can be found in Table 1 below.
表1
Table 1
网络设备可以是其它为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为方便描述,本申请实施例并不限定。Network devices can be other devices that provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology or form of the network device. For ease of description, the embodiments of this application are not limited.
网络设备还可以包括核心网设备,核心网设备例如包括第四代(4th generation,4G)网络中的移动性管理实体(mobility management entity,MME),归属用户服务器(home subscriber server,HSS),服务网关(serving gateway,S-GW),策略和计费规则功能(policy and charging rules function,PCRF),公共数据网网关(public data network gateway,PDN gateway,P-GW);5G网络中的访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)或会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)等网元。此外,该核心网设备还可以包括5G网络以及5G网络的下一代网络中的其他核心网设备。Network equipment may also include core network equipment, such as the Mobility Management Entity (MME), Home Subscriber Server (HSS), Serving Gateway (S-GW), Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF), and Public Data Network Gateway (PDN Gateway) in 4G networks; and access and mobility management function (AMF), user plane function (UPF), or session management function (SMF) in 5G networks. Furthermore, this core network equipment may also include other core network equipment in 5G networks and next-generation networks of 5G networks.
本申请实施例中,上述网络设备还可以是具有人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)能力的网络节点,可以为终端或其他网络设备提供AI服务,例如,可以为网络侧(接入网或核心网)的AI节点、算力节点、具有AI能力的RAN节点、具有AI能力的核心网网元等。In this embodiment of the application, the network device mentioned above can also be a network node with artificial intelligence (AI) capabilities, which can provide AI services to terminals or other network devices. For example, it can be an AI node, computing power node, RAN node with AI capabilities, core network element with AI capabilities, etc. on the network side (access network or core network).
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In this application embodiment, the device for implementing the function of the network device can be the network device itself, or it can be a device capable of supporting the network device in implementing that function, such as a chip system, which can be installed in the network device. In the technical solutions provided in this application embodiment, the example of a network device being used to implement the function of the network device is used to describe the technical solutions provided in this application embodiment.
(3)配置与预配置:在本申请中,会同时用到配置与预配置。配置是指网络设备通过消息或信令将一些参数的配置信息或参数的取值发送给终端设备,以便终端设备根据这些取值或信息来确定通信的参数或传输时的资源。预配置与配置类似,可以是网络设备预先与终端设备协商好的参数信息或参数值,也可以是标准协议规定的网络设备或终端设备采用的参数信息或参数值,还可以是预先存储在网络设备或终端设备的参数信息或参数值。本申请对此不做限定。(3) Configuration and Pre-configuration: In this application, both configuration and pre-configuration are used. Configuration refers to the network device sending configuration information or parameter values of some parameters to the terminal device through messages or signaling, so that the terminal device can determine the communication parameters or resources during transmission based on these values or information. Pre-configuration is similar to configuration; it can be parameter information or parameter values that the network device and the terminal device have negotiated in advance, or it can be parameter information or parameter values that the network device or the terminal device uses as specified by the standard protocol, or it can be parameter information or parameter values that are pre-stored in the network device or the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
进一步地,这些取值和参数,是可以变化或更新的。Furthermore, these values and parameters can be changed or updated.
(4)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B和C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。(4) The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of this application can be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "more" means two or more. "And/or" describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, or B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the related objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, the ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects.
(5)本申请实施例中的“发送”和“接收”,表示信号传递的走向。例如,“向XX发送信息”可以理解为该信息的目的端是XX,可以包括通过空口直接发送,也包括其他单元或模块通过空口间接发送。“接收来自YY的信息”可以理解为该信息的源端是YY,可以包括通过空口直接从YY接收,也可以包括通过空口从其他单元或模块间接地从YY接收。“发送”也可以理解为芯片接口的“输出”,“接收”也可以理解为芯片接口的“输入”。(5) In the embodiments of this application, "send" and "receive" indicate the direction of signal transmission. For example, "send information to XX" can be understood as the destination of the information being XX, which may include sending directly through the air interface or sending indirectly through the air interface by other units or modules. "Receive information from YY" can be understood as the source of the information being YY, which may include receiving directly from YY through the air interface or receiving indirectly from YY through the air interface by other units or modules. "Send" can also be understood as the "output" of the chip interface, and "receive" can also be understood as the "input" of the chip interface.
换言之,发送和接收可以是在设备之间进行的,例如,网络设备和终端设备之间进行的,也可以是在设备内进行的,例如,通过总线、走线或接口在设备内的部件之间、模组之间、芯片之间、软件模块或者硬件模块之间发送或接收。In other words, sending and receiving can occur between devices, such as between network devices and terminal devices, or within a device, such as between components, modules, chips, software modules, or hardware modules within the device via buses, wiring, or interfaces.
可以理解的是,信息在信息发送的源端和目的端之间可能会被进行必要的处理,比如编码、调制等,但目的端可以理解来自源端的有效信息。本申请中类似的表述可以做相似的理解,不再赘述。It is understandable that information may undergo necessary processing, such as encoding and modulation, between the source and destination, but the destination can understand the valid information from the source. Similar statements in this application can be interpreted in a similar way and will not be elaborated further.
(6)地理区域。在本申请的实施例中,地理区域可以替换为区域。其中,区域相对于地球固定,或者理解为区域指相对地球固定的地理区域。(6) Geographical region. In the embodiments of this application, a geographic region may be replaced with a region. Herein, a region is fixed relative to the Earth, or it can be understood as a geographic area that is fixed relative to the Earth.
示例性的,区域可以具有以下至少一项属性:形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积、地理位置等。此外,“区域”还可以具有高度属性,即区域可以理解为某个给定高度或高度范围的地理区域。例如,区域可以指地面上海拔高度为0km或海拔高度0km正负2km范围内的地理区域,或者指某一平均海拔高度的地理区域,也可以指某一个特定高度的地理区域,例如海拔高度10km或海拔高度10km正负3km范围内的地理区域。For example, a region may have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographic location, etc. Furthermore, a "region" may also have an altitude attribute, meaning a region can be understood as a geographic area at a given altitude or within a given altitude range. For instance, a region may refer to a geographic area on the ground with an elevation of 0 km or within a range of 0 km ± 2 km, or a geographic area at a certain average altitude, or a geographic area at a specific altitude, such as an elevation of 10 km or within a range of 10 km ± 3 km.
可选地,上述相对于地球固定的区域也可以称为“波位”、“地理区域”等。当然,还可以有其他名称,本申请对相对于地球固定的区域的名称不作具体限定。Alternatively, the aforementioned region fixed relative to the Earth can also be referred to as a "wave position," "geographic region," etc. Of course, other names are also possible, and this application does not specifically limit the name of the region fixed relative to the Earth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,不同区域的形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积可以相同也可以不相同。不同区域的地理位置不同。不同区域之间可以存在重叠也可以不存在重叠。In one possible implementation, the shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas of different regions may be the same or different. The geographical locations of the different regions may differ. The different regions may or may not overlap.
在一种可能的实现方式中,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不变,例如区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不随时间的变化而变化。或者,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域轮廓以及区域中的点可以通过地球固定坐标系描述,或区域轮廓上的各个点在地球固定坐标系中的坐标固定不变。In one possible implementation, the region being fixed relative to the Earth can be understood as follows: the region's outline, size, or geographical location remains unchanged; for example, the region's outline, size, or geographical location does not change over time. Alternatively, the region being fixed relative to the Earth can be understood as follows: the region's outline and the points within it can be described using a fixed Earth coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the region's outline in the fixed Earth coordinate system remain constant.
在一种可能的实现方式中,区域的形状可以为正六边形,或者为其他形状如正五边形、圆形、椭圆形等。或者,区域的形状还可以为不规则形状,不予限制。In one possible implementation, the shape of the region can be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc. Alternatively, the shape of the region can also be irregular, without restriction.
示例性的,区域的形状可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域形状可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域形状。类似的,区域的大小、半径、面积也可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域大小、半径、面积可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域大小、多种区域半径、或多种区域面积。For example, the shape of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different shapes. The same network device can also define multiple region shapes. Similarly, the size, radius, and area of a region can also be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different sizes, radii, or areas. The same network device can also define multiple region sizes, multiple region radii, or multiple region areas.
在一种可能的实现方式中,可以将地球表面划分为多个区域,并对多个区域进行索引(如编号)。终端设备和网络设备可以约定对这些区域的编号方式(如从1开始编号还是从0开始编号)以及区域与索引的对应关系。或者协议可以定义对这些区域的编号方式以及区域与索引的对应关系。基于区域的索引,可以确定区域的地理位置等信息。In one possible implementation, the Earth's surface can be divided into multiple regions, and these regions can be indexed (e.g., numbered). Terminal devices and network devices can agree on the numbering method for these regions (e.g., starting from 1 or 0) and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Alternatively, the protocol can define the numbering method for these regions and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Based on the region indexes, information such as the region's geographical location can be determined.
可选的,划分的多个区域可以完全覆盖地球表面,如地球表面上的任意位置均属于某个区域;或者,划分的多个区域也可以覆盖地球上的部分地理位置,例如,该多个区域可以不覆盖地球南极和/或北极,即南极和/或北极可以不存在该区域。Optionally, the multiple regions can completely cover the Earth's surface, such that any location on the Earth's surface belongs to a certain region; or, the multiple regions can also cover part of the geographical location on Earth, for example, the multiple regions may not cover the Earth's South Pole and/or North Pole, that is, the South Pole and/or North Pole may not exist in the region.
可选的,划分多个区域的方式可以由协议定义,或者可以由网络设备定义。不同网络设备定义的划分方式可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种划分方式。Optionally, the method of dividing the network into multiple zones can be defined by a protocol or by the network device. Different network devices can define the same or different division methods. The same network device can also define multiple division methods.
作为第一种可能的划分方式,可以使用一种粒度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,例如,可以以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分地球表面。若仅采用该离散方式,则全球可以划分为360×360=129600个区域,终端设备和网络设备可以将该129600个区域的索引约定为0,1,…,129599,或者也可以约定为1,2,…,129600。As a first possible method of partitioning, the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity, for example, a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree. If only this discretization method is used, the globe can be divided into 360×360=129600 regions. Terminal devices and network devices can define the indexes of these 129600 regions as 0,1,…,129599, or they can also define them as 1,2,…,129600.
可选的,当引入地理区域的高度属性后,可定义多张网格划分地球表面,例如海拔高度为0km或海拔0km正负2km范围内的网格可以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,产生129600个区域。海拔高度10km位置或10km正负3km范围内,再以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分,又产生129600个区域。在对这些网格进行索引时,需对单层网格的索引范围进行扩展,例如总索引为0,1,…,129599,129600,129601,…,259199,其中前129600个序号表示海拔高度为0km的网格索引,后129600个序号表示海拔高度为10km的网格索引。Optionally, when introducing the altitude attribute of a geographic region, multiple grids can be defined to divide the Earth's surface. For example, a grid at an altitude of 0 km or within a range of 0 km ± 2 km can be divided into 1-degree latitude and longitude grids, generating 129,600 regions. At an altitude of 10 km or within a range of 10 km ± 3 km, another 1-degree latitude and longitude grid can be used, generating yet another 129,600 regions. When indexing these grids, the index range of a single-layer grid needs to be expanded. For example, the total index could be 0, 1, ..., 129599, 129600, 129601, ..., 259199, where the first 129,600 indices represent the grid index at an altitude of 0 km, and the last 129,600 indices represent the grid index at an altitude of 10 km.
示例性的,经纬度网格的粒度可以根据网络设备的类型确定。例如,在网络设备为LEO卫星的情况下,可以采用相对较小的颗粒度进行离散;在网络设备为GEO卫星的情况下,可以采用相对较大的颗粒度进行离散。For example, the granularity of the latitude and longitude grid can be determined based on the type of network device. For instance, a relatively small granularity can be used for discretization when the network device is a LEO satellite, and a relatively large granularity can be used when the network device is a GEO satellite.
作为第二种可能的划分方式,可以使用多种粒度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,例如,在地球的一部分表面或部分行政区域内以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格进行划分,在另一部分表面或行政区域内以颗粒度为2度的经纬度网络进行划分。As a second possible method of division, the Earth's surface can be divided using latitude and longitude grids of various granularities. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a portion of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees.
或者,在引入地理区域的高度属性后,海拔高度为0处可以以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,海拔高度为10km处可以以颗粒度为2度的经纬度网格划分地球表面。Alternatively, by introducing the altitude attribute of a geographic region, the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree at an altitude of 0 km, and the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees at an altitude of 10 km.
作为第三种可能的划分方式,可以以行政区域划分地球表面。例如,将一个乡级行政区域作为一个区域。As a third possible method of division, the Earth's surface can be divided by administrative regions. For example, a township-level administrative region could be considered as a region.
作为第四种可能的划分方式,对于GEO卫星,可以将GEO卫星的一个波束在地面的投影作为一个区域。由于GEO卫星相对于地球静止,因此,可以认为GEO卫星的波束在地面的投影相对于地球固定。As a fourth possible division method, for GEO satellites, the projection of one of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered as a region. Since GEO satellites are stationary relative to the Earth, the projection of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered fixed relative to the Earth.
在实际应用中,可以结合多种划分方式对地球表面进行划分,例如,在地球的一部分表面或部分行政区域内以颗粒度为1的经纬度网格进行划分,在另一部分表面或行政区域内按照行政区域进行划分。In practical applications, the Earth's surface can be divided using a combination of different methods. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a part of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided according to its administrative region.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在将地球表面划分为多个区域的情况下,可以对同一地表范围进行不同层级的区域划分。示例性的,对于某个地表范围,可以以颗粒度为10度的经纬度网格进行第一层级的区域划分,以颗粒度为6的经纬度网络进行第二层级的区域划分,以颗粒度为1的经纬度网格进行第三层级的区域划分。此时,该地表范围内,第一层级的区域数目大于第二层级的区域数目,第二层级的区域数目大于第三层级的区域数目。此外,该场景下,每一层级的区域可以单独进行编号。In one possible implementation, when the Earth's surface is divided into multiple regions, different levels of region division can be applied to the same surface area. For example, for a given surface area, a first level of region division can be performed using a 10-degree granularity latitude and longitude grid, a second level using a 6-degree granularity grid, and a third level using a 1-degree granularity grid. In this case, within the surface area, the number of regions at the first level is greater than the number at the second level, and the number of regions at the second level is greater than the number at the third level. Furthermore, in this scenario, each level of region can be individually numbered.
(7)在本申请实施例中,“指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示,也可以包括显式指示和隐式指示。将某一信息(如下文所述的指示信息)所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系;还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的,例如可以借助预先约定(例如协议预定义)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。本申请对于指示的具体方式不作限定。可以理解的是,对于该指示信息的发送方来说,该指示信息可用于指示待指示信息,对于指示信息的接收方来说,该指示信息可用于确定待指示信息。(7) In the embodiments of this application, "instruction" may include direct instruction and indirect instruction, as well as explicit instruction and implicit instruction. The information indicated by a certain piece of information (as described below, the instruction information) is called the information to be instructed. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be instructed, such as, but not limited to, directly indicating the information to be instructed, such as the information to be instructed itself or its index. It can also indirectly indicate the information to be instructed by indicating other information, where there is an association between the other information and the information to be instructed; or it can only indicate a part of the information to be instructed, while the other parts of the information to be instructed are known or pre-agreed upon. For example, the instruction can be implemented by using a pre-agreed (e.g., protocol predefined) arrangement order of various information, thereby reducing the instruction overhead to a certain extent. This application does not limit the specific method of instruction. It is understood that for the sender of the instruction information, the instruction information can be used to indicate the information to be instructed; for the receiver of the instruction information, the instruction information can be used to determine the information to be instructed.
本申请中,除特殊说明外,各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例、以及各实施例中的各个方法/设计/实现方式中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间、以及各实施例中的各个方法/设计/实现方式之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例、以及各实施例中的各个方法/设计/实现方式中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例、方法、或实现方式。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between the various embodiments can be referred to each other. In the various embodiments of this application, and the various methods/designs/implementations within each embodiment, unless otherwise specified or logically conflicting, the terminology and/or descriptions between different embodiments and between the various methods/designs/implementations within each embodiment are consistent and can be mutually referenced. The technical features in different embodiments and the various methods/designs/implementations within each embodiment can be combined to form new embodiments, methods, or implementations based on their inherent logical relationships. The following descriptions of the embodiments of this application do not constitute a limitation on the scope of protection of this application.
本申请可以应用于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或者,新无线车联网(NR vehicle to everything,NR V2X)系统;还可以应用于LTE和5G混合组网的系统中;或者设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)通信系统、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信系统、物联网(Internet of Things,IoT),或者,无人机通信系统;或者是支持多种无线技术例如支持LTE技术和NR技术的通信系统等;或者是非地面通信系统,例如:卫星通信系统、高空通信平台等。另外可选的,该通信系统也可以适用于窄带物联网系统(narrow band-internet of things,NB-IoT)、或者是其它的通信系统,其中,该通信系统中包括网络设备和终端设备,网络设备作为配置信息发送实体,终端设备作为配置信息接收实体。具体来说,该通信系统中存在实体向另一实体发送配置信息,并向另一实体发送数据、或接收另一实体发送的数据;另一个实体接收配置信息,并根据配置信息向配置信息发送实体发送数据、或接收配置信息发送实体发送的数据。其中,本申请可应用于处于连接状态或激活状态(active)的终端设备、也可以应用于处于非连接状态(inactive)或空闲态(idle)的终端设备。This application can be applied to long-term evolution (LTE) systems, new radio (NR) systems, or new wireless vehicle-to-everything (NR V2X) systems; it can also be applied to systems with hybrid LTE and 5G networks; or device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, machine-to-machine (M2M) communication systems, Internet of Things (IoT) systems, or drone communication systems; or communication systems supporting multiple wireless technologies, such as those supporting LTE and NR technologies; or non-terrestrial communication systems, such as satellite communication systems and high-altitude communication platforms. Alternatively, this communication system can also be applied to narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT) systems or other communication systems, wherein the communication system includes network devices and terminal devices, with the network devices acting as configuration information sending entities and the terminal devices acting as configuration information receiving entities. Specifically, in this communication system, one entity sends configuration information to another entity and sends data to or receives data from another entity; the other entity receives the configuration information and, based on the configuration information, sends data to or receives data from the entity that sent the configuration information. This application can be applied to terminal devices in a connected or active state, as well as to terminal devices in an inactive or idle state.
请参阅图1,为本申请的实施例应用的通信系统1000的架构示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)100和核心网200,可选的,通信系统1000还可以包括互联网300。其中,RAN100包括至少一个RAN节点(如图1中的110a和110b,统称为110),还可以包括至少一个终端(如图1中的120a-120j,统称为120)。RAN100还可以包括其它RAN节点,例如,无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备(图1中未示出)。终端120通过无线的方式与RAN节点110相连,RAN节点110通过无线或有线方式与核心网200连接。核心网200中的核心网设备与RAN100中的RAN节点110可以是独立的不同的物理设备,也可以是集成了核心网设备的逻辑功能与RAN节点的逻辑功能的同一个物理设备。终端和终端之间以及RAN节点和RAN节点之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互连接。Please refer to Figure 1, which is a schematic diagram of the architecture of the communication system 1000 used in the embodiments of this application. As shown in Figure 1, the communication system includes a radio access network (RAN) 100 and a core network 200. Optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include an Internet 300. The RAN 100 includes at least one RAN node (110a and 110b in Figure 1, collectively referred to as 110), and may also include at least one terminal (120a-120j in Figure 1, collectively referred to as 120). The RAN 100 may also include other RAN nodes, such as wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices (not shown in Figure 1). The terminal 120 is wirelessly connected to the RAN node 110, and the RAN node 110 is wirelessly or wiredly connected to the core network 200. The core network equipment in the core network 200 and the RAN node 110 in the RAN 100 can be independent and different physical devices, or they can be the same physical device integrating the logical functions of the core network equipment and the logical functions of the RAN node. Terminals can be connected to each other, as can RAN nodes, via wired or wireless means.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例的技术方案适用于地面通信系统。或,本申请实施例的技术方案适用于地面通信和卫星通信融合的通信系统,该通信系统也可以称为非地面网络(non-terrestrial network,NTN)通信系统。示例性的,图1中的RAN100可以包括地面基站,其中,该地面基站可以包括TN小区(即该TN小区的信号可以通过该地面基站进行收发);并且,图1中的RAN100还可以包括非地面基站,以该非地面基站为卫星为例,该卫星可以包括NTN小区(即该NTN小区的信号可以通过该卫星进行收发)。其中,地面通信系统例如可以为长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、5G通信系统或新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或5G通信系统下一步发展的通信系统等,此处不做限定。It should be noted that the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are applicable to terrestrial communication systems. Alternatively, the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are applicable to communication systems that integrate terrestrial and satellite communication, which can also be called non-terrestrial network (NTN) communication systems. For example, RAN100 in Figure 1 may include a terrestrial base station, wherein the terrestrial base station may include a TN cell (i.e., the signal of the TN cell can be transmitted and received through the terrestrial base station); and RAN100 in Figure 1 may also include a non-terrestrial base station, taking a satellite as an example, the satellite may include an NTN cell (i.e., the signal of the NTN cell can be transmitted and received through the satellite). The terrestrial communication system may be, for example, a long term evolution (LTE) system, a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS), a 5G communication system, or a new radio (NR) system, or a communication system that is the next step in the development of 5G communication systems, etc., and is not limited here.
其中,卫星通信相对于传统的移动通信系统,其拥有更广的覆盖范围,通信成本与传输距离无关,可以克服海洋,沙漠,高山等自然地理障碍等优点。为了克服传统通信网的不足,卫星通信可以作为传统网络的一个有效的补充。一般认为,与地面网络通信相比,非地面网络通信具有不同的信道特性,例如大传输时延,大多普勒频偏。示例性的,GEO卫星通信的往返时延为238~270毫秒(ms)。LEO卫星通信的往返时延为8ms~20ms。根据轨道高度的不同可以将卫星通信系统区分为如下三种:高轨(geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星通信系统,也称同步轨道卫星系统;中轨(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星通信系统和低轨(low earth orbit,LEO)卫星通信系统。Compared to traditional mobile communication systems, satellite communication offers advantages such as wider coverage, communication costs independent of transmission distance, and the ability to overcome natural geographical barriers like oceans, deserts, and mountains. To overcome the shortcomings of traditional communication networks, satellite communication can serve as an effective supplement. It is generally believed that non-terrestrial network communication has different channel characteristics compared to terrestrial network communication, such as large transmission delays and Doppler frequency offsets. For example, the round-trip time (RTT) of GEO satellite communication is 238–270 milliseconds (ms), while that of LEO satellite communication is 8 ms–20 ms. Based on orbital altitude, satellite communication systems can be classified into three types: geostationary orbit (GEO) satellite communication systems (also known as geosynchronous orbit satellite systems); medium orbit (MEO) satellite communication systems; and low orbit (LEO) satellite communication systems.
其中,GEO卫星一般又称为静止轨道卫星,轨道高度可以为35786千米(km),其主要的优点是相对地面静止并且提供很大的覆盖面积。然而由于GEO卫星轨道卫星缺点也相对突出:如距离地球距离过大,需要较大口径的天线;其传输时延较大,在0.5秒左右,无法满足实时业务的需求;同时其轨道资源相对紧张,发射成本高并且无法为两极地区提供覆盖。MEO卫星,轨道高度位于2000~35786km,拥有相对较少的卫星数目即可以实现全球覆盖,但是其传输时延相比LEO卫星较高,其主要的用于定位导航。此外,轨道高度在300~2000km称为低轨卫星(LEO),LEO卫星比MEO和GEO轨道高度低,数据传播时延小,功率损耗更小,发射成本相对更低。因此LEO卫星通信网络在近年来取得了长足进展,受到关注。GEO satellites, also known as geostationary orbit satellites, orbit at an altitude of 35,786 kilometers. Their main advantages are relative stationary position and large coverage area. However, GEO satellites also have significant drawbacks: their large distance from Earth necessitates larger antennas; their transmission latency is relatively high, around 0.5 seconds, failing to meet the demands of real-time services; and their orbital resources are relatively scarce, resulting in high launch costs and an inability to provide coverage to polar regions. MEO satellites, orbiting at altitudes between 2,000 and 35,786 km, can achieve global coverage with a relatively small number of satellites, but their transmission latency is higher than that of LEO satellites, and they are primarily used for positioning and navigation. Furthermore, satellites orbiting at altitudes between 300 and 2,000 km are called Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellites. LEO satellites are lower in altitude than MEO and GEO satellites, resulting in lower data propagation latency, lower power loss, and relatively lower launch costs. Therefore, LEO satellite communication networks have made significant progress and attracted considerable attention in recent years.
在一种可能的实现方式中,卫星设备按照工作模式可以分为透传(transparent)模式和再生(regenerative)模式。In one possible implementation, satellite equipment can be categorized into transparent mode and regenerative mode based on its operating mode.
下面将通过图2a、图2b、图2c和图2d所示实现方式,对这两种模式进行示例性说明。The two modes will be illustrated below using the implementation methods shown in Figures 2a, 2b, 2c, and 2d.
如图2a所示透传模式的实现方式中,卫星和关口站(即图2a中的NTN Gateway)作为中继,即图2a所示的射频拉远单元(Remote Radio Unit),终端设备和gNB之间需要通过该中继过程实现通信。换言之,在透传模式下,卫星具有中继转发的功能。In the transparent transmission mode implementation shown in Figure 2a, the satellite and the gateway station (i.e., the NTN Gateway in Figure 2a) act as relays, specifically the Remote Radio Unit shown in Figure 2a. Communication between the terminal equipment and the gNB requires this relay process. In other words, in transparent transmission mode, the satellite has a relay forwarding function.
示例性的,在图2b所示透传模式的实现方式中,卫星(包括GEO卫星、MEO卫星、LEO卫星等)工作在透传模式时,卫星具有中继转发的功能。关口站(或信关站)具有基站的功能或部分基站功能,此时可以将关口站看做是基站。或者,基站可以与关口站分开部署,那么馈电链路的时延就包括卫星到关口站以及关口站到gNB的时延两部分。For example, in the transparent transmission mode implementation shown in Figure 2b, when the satellite (including GEO satellites, MEO satellites, LEO satellites, etc.) operates in transparent transmission mode, the satellite has a relay forwarding function. The gateway station (or signaling station) has the function of a base station or part of the function of a base station; in this case, the gateway station can be regarded as a base station. Alternatively, the base station can be deployed separately from the gateway station, in which case the delay of the feeder link includes two parts: the delay from the satellite to the gateway station and the delay from the gateway station to the gNB.
可选地,透传模式可以是以关口站和gNB在一起或位置相近的情况为例,对于关口站与gNB相距较远的情况,馈电链路时延将卫星到关口站和关口站到gNB的时延相加即可。Optionally, the transparent transmission mode can be used as an example where the gateway station and gNB are together or in close proximity. For cases where the gateway station and gNB are far apart, the feeder link delay can be calculated by adding the delay from the satellite to the gateway station and the delay from the gateway station to the gNB.
如图2c所示再生模式的实现方式中,卫星和关口站(即图2c中的NTN Gateway)作为gNB,可以与终端设备进行通信。换言之,在再生模式下,卫星具有基站的功能或部分基站功能,此时可以将卫星看做是基站。As shown in Figure 2c, in the regeneration mode implementation, the satellite and the gateway station (i.e., the NTN Gateway in Figure 2c) act as gNBs and can communicate with the terminal devices. In other words, in regeneration mode, the satellite has the functions of a base station or some of the functions of a base station, and in this case, the satellite can be regarded as a base station.
示例性的,在图2d所示再生模式的实现方式中,卫星(包括GEO卫星、MEO卫星、LEO卫星等)工作在再生模式时,相比于图2b所示实现方式,卫星具有基站的功能或部分基站功能,此时可以将卫星看做是基站(即空中基站)。For example, in the regeneration mode implementation shown in Figure 2d, when the satellite (including GEO satellites, MEO satellites, LEO satellites, etc.) is working in regeneration mode, compared with the implementation shown in Figure 2b, the satellite has the function of a base station or part of the function of a base station. In this case, the satellite can be regarded as a base station (i.e., an airborne base station).
可选地,在图2b和/或图2d中,卫星可以通过其它方式实现,例如图中的无人机或高空平台。Alternatively, in Figures 2b and/or 2d, the satellite can be implemented in other ways, such as by a drone or a high-altitude platform as shown in the figures.
需要说明的是,NTN和地面网络的基站之间可以通过共同的核心网实现互联。也可以通过基站间定义的接口实现更高时效性的协助和互联,在NR中,基站间接口称为Xn接口,基站和核心网的接口称为NG接口。融合网络中NTN节点和地面节点都可以前述接口实现互通和协同。It should be noted that NTN and terrestrial network base stations can be interconnected through a shared core network. They can also achieve more timely assistance and interconnection through interfaces defined between base stations. In NR, the interface between base stations is called the Xn interface, and the interface between the base station and the core network is called the NG interface. In a converged network, both NTN nodes and terrestrial nodes can achieve interoperability and collaboration through these interfaces.
此外,作为网络设备的卫星可以发送星历(ephemeris)信息,以便于该星历信息的接收方(例如终端设备或者其面基站或者其它卫星等)能够基于该星历信息确定该卫星的运行轨道的相关信息。作为一种实现示例,该星历信息可以包括下述表2中的一项或多项信息。或者,终端设备可以通过预配置的方式获知表2中的一项或多项信息。Furthermore, satellites acting as network devices can transmit ephemeris information so that the recipient of this ephemeris information (e.g., a terminal device, its base station, or other satellites) can determine relevant information about the satellite's orbit based on the ephemeris information. As one implementation example, the ephemeris information may include one or more of the information in Table 2 below. Alternatively, the terminal device may obtain one or more of the information in Table 2 through pre-configuration.
表2
Table 2
需要说明的是,在实际应用中,可以把表2中的最后一个参数近地时刻tp替换为真近点角或平近点角表示,其作用相同,如表3所示。It should be noted that in practical applications, the last parameter in Table 2, the time of near-Earth, tp, can be replaced with the true anomaly angle or the mean anomaly angle, and the effect is the same, as shown in Table 3.
表3
Table 3
需要说明的是,本申请可以应用于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或者是未来的通信网络/系统。It should be noted that this application can be applied to long term evolution (LTE) systems, new radio (NR) systems, or future communication networks/systems.
以5G为例,一种5G卫星通信系统架构如图3所示。地面终端设备通过5G新空口接入网络,5G基站部署在卫星上,并通过无线链路与地面的核心网相连。同时,在卫星之间存在无线链路,完成基站与基站之间的信令交互和用户数据传输。图3中的设备和接口的说明如下:Taking 5G as an example, a 5G satellite communication system architecture is shown in Figure 3. Ground terminal equipment accesses the network through the 5G New Radio interface, while 5G base stations are deployed on satellites and connected to the ground core network via wireless links. Simultaneously, wireless links exist between satellites to facilitate signaling interaction and user data transmission between base stations. The devices and interfaces in Figure 3 are described below:
5G核心网:用户接入控制,移动性管理,会话管理,用户安全认证,计费等业务。它有多个功能单元组成,可以分为控制面和数据面的功能实体。接入与移动管理单元(access and mobility management function,AMF),负责用户接入管理,安全认证,还有移动性管理。用户面单元(user plane function,UPF)负责管理用户面数据的传输,流量统计等功能。会话管理功能(session management function,SMF),主要用于移动网络中的会话管理,如会话建立、修改、释放。5G Core Network: This includes services such as user access control, mobility management, session management, user security authentication, and billing. It consists of multiple functional units, which can be divided into control plane and data plane functional entities. The Access and Mobility Management Unit (AMF) is responsible for user access management, security authentication, and mobility management. The User Plane Unit (UPF) is responsible for managing user plane data transmission and traffic statistics. The Session Management Function (SMF) is mainly used for session management in the mobile network, such as session establishment, modification, and release.
地面站:负责转发卫星基站和5G核心网之间的信令和业务数据。Ground station: Responsible for forwarding signaling and service data between satellite base stations and the 5G core network.
5G新空口:终端和基站之间的无线链路。5G New Radio: The wireless link between a terminal and a base station.
Xn接口:5G基站和基站之间的接口,主要用于切换等信令交互。Xn interface: The interface between 5G base stations, mainly used for signaling interactions such as handover.
NG接口:5G基站和5G核心网之间接口,主要交互核心网的非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS)信令等,以及用户的业务数据。NG interface: The interface between 5G base stations and 5G core networks, mainly used for exchanging non-access stratum (NAS) signaling of the core network and user service data.
此外,可将地面网络通信系统中的网络设备和NTN通信系统中的卫星,统一看作网络设备。用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备;也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。以下描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案时,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是卫星为例,来描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。可以理解,将本申请实施例提供的方法应用到地面网络通信系统时,可以将卫星执行的动作应用到基站或网络设备来执行。Furthermore, network devices in terrestrial network communication systems and satellites in NTN communication systems can be uniformly considered as network devices. The apparatus used to implement the functions of a network device can be a network device itself; it can also be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device in implementing that function, such as a chip system, which can be installed within the network device. In the following description of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application, a satellite is used as an example to illustrate the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application. It is understood that when the methods provided by the embodiments of this application are applied to terrestrial network communication systems, the actions performed by the satellite can be applied to the base station or network device for execution.
本申请实施例中,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备;也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现终端设备的功能的装置是终端或UE为例,来描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In this application embodiment, the device for implementing the functions of the terminal device can be the terminal device itself; it can also be a device capable of supporting the terminal device in implementing the functions, such as a chip system, which can be installed in the terminal device. In this application embodiment, the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices. In the technical solutions provided in this application embodiment, the device for implementing the functions of the terminal device is a terminal or UE as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in this application embodiment.
另外,上述的卫星可以为静止卫星、非静止卫星、人造卫星、低轨道卫星、中轨道卫星以及高轨道卫星等,本申请在此不具体限定。In addition, the aforementioned satellites can be geostationary satellites, non-geostationary satellites, artificial satellites, low-Earth orbit satellites, medium-Earth orbit satellites, and high-Earth orbit satellites, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
上述内容介绍了本申请涉及的无线通信的多种场景,应理解,上述内容仅仅为本申请可以应用的场景的示例性说明,本申请还可以应用于其它的应用场景中,此处不做限定。下面将介绍本申请涉及的无线通信过程。The foregoing content describes various wireless communication scenarios involved in this application. It should be understood that the above content is merely an illustrative description of the scenarios in which this application can be applied, and this application can also be applied to other application scenarios, which are not limited here. The wireless communication process involved in this application will be described below.
在图1/图2a/图2b/图2c/图2d/图3所示通信系统中,传统的网络设备可以是固定在地面某处的设备,例如地面网络(terrestrial network,TN)小区所属的地面基站。其中,TN小区的波束管理过程(例如判断当前波束是否发生波束失败事件的过程、在多个候选波束中选择目标波束的过程)的依据,为终端设备接收的参考信号接收强度,该参考信号来自网络设备。In the communication systems shown in Figures 1/2a/2b/2c/2d/3, traditional network equipment can be fixed at a certain location on the ground, such as the ground base station to which a terrestrial network (TN) cell belongs. The beam management process of the TN cell (e.g., determining whether a beam failure event has occurred in the current beam, and selecting a target beam from multiple candidate beams) is based on the received strength of a reference signal received by the terminal equipment, which originates from the network equipment.
随着通信技术的发展,网络设备有可能不会固定在地面某处,例如该网络设备可以为非地面网络(non-terrestrial network,NTN)小区所属的高速移动的设备,包括但不限于低轨道卫星、中轨道卫星以及高轨道卫星等卫星设备。With the development of communication technology, network equipment may not be fixed in a certain place on the ground. For example, the network equipment may be a high-speed mobile device belonging to a non-terrestrial network (NTN) cell, including but not limited to satellite equipment such as low-Earth orbit satellites, medium-Earth orbit satellites, and high-Earth orbit satellites.
然而,不同于TN小区所属的地面基站,由于NTN小区所属的卫星设备有可能存在高速移动,在某个时刻,一个NTN小区的参考信号接收强度较强,并不意味着在后续的一个或多个时刻上,该NTN小区的参考信号接收强度仍能保持较强的水平,这就导致上述TN小区的波束管理过程不再适用。However, unlike the ground base stations to which TN cells belong, the satellite equipment to which NTN cells belong may move at high speeds. At a certain moment, the reference signal reception strength of an NTN cell is strong, but this does not mean that the reference signal reception strength of the NTN cell will remain strong at one or more subsequent moments. This makes the beam management process of TN cells no longer applicable.
为了解决上述问题,本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关装置,下面将结合附图进行详细描述。To address the aforementioned problems, this application provides a communication method and related apparatus, which will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
请参阅图4,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to Figure 4, which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in this application. The method includes the following steps.
应理解,图4以及后文图7所示方法中,以不同的通信设备(例如第一终端设备、网络设备等)作为交互步骤的执行主体为例来示意该方法,但本申请并不限制该交互步骤的执行主体。例如,在图4或图7的实现过程中,交互步骤可以通过通信设备执行,也可以通过支持该通信设备实现该交互步骤的芯片、芯片系统、处理器、电路、逻辑模块或软件等。It should be understood that the methods shown in Figure 4 and Figure 7 below are illustrated using different communication devices (such as a first terminal device, network device, etc.) as examples of the execution subjects of the interaction steps, but this application does not limit the execution subject of the interaction steps. For example, in the implementation of Figure 4 or Figure 7, the interaction steps can be executed by a communication device, or by a chip, chip system, processor, circuit, logic module, or software that supports the communication device to implement the interaction steps.
可选地,在下述图4和图7中,网络设备可以为接入网设备,该接入网设备可以为ORAN网元。Optionally, in Figures 4 and 7 below, the network device can be an access network device, which can be an ORAN network element.
例如,该网络设备可以包括O-CU、O-DU、O-RU;在下述步骤S400或S700中,可以通过O-CU和/或O-DU,控制O-RU发送第一可见性信息。For example, the network device may include O-CU, O-DU, and O-RU; in step S400 or S700 below, the O-RU can be controlled to send the first visibility information through the O-CU and/or O-DU.
又如,该网络设备可以包括O-CU、O-DU、O-RU;在下述步骤S702中,可以通过O-CU和/或O-DU,控制O-RU发送第一配置信息。For example, the network device may include O-CU, O-DU, and O-RU; in step S702 below, the O-CU and/or O-DU can be used to control the O-RU to send the first configuration information.
S400.网络设备发送第一可见性信息,相应的,第一终端设备接收该第一可见性信息。其中,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量。S400. The network device sends first visibility information, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first visibility information. The first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device.
可选的,步骤S400为可选步骤。换言之,第一终端设备可以通过多种方式获取第一可见性信息。Optionally, step S400 is optional. In other words, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information in multiple ways.
例如,第一终端设备可以基于其它设备(例如终端设备、网络设备等)的指示以获得第一可见性信息,能够降低第一终端设备的实现复杂度。For example, the first terminal device can obtain first visibility information based on instructions from other devices (such as terminal devices, network devices, etc.), which can reduce the implementation complexity of the first terminal device.
又如,在步骤S401中,第一终端设备通过自身的信息采集模块(例如摄像头、麦克风、天线、雷达、传感器等)得到的信息确定该第一可见性信息。For example, in step S401, the first terminal device determines the first visibility information by obtaining information from its own information acquisition module (such as camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.).
可选的,步骤S400和步骤S401可以择一实现,即第一终端设备可以基于这两个步骤中的其中一个步骤获得第一可见性信息。Optionally, steps S400 and S401 can be implemented in one of them, that is, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information based on one of these two steps.
可选的,步骤S400和步骤S401都可以执行。其中,如果第一终端设备在步骤S400中接收的第一可见性信息,与第一终端设备在步骤S401中获取的第一可见性信息不一致的情况下,该第一终端设备可以任意舍弃/忽略其中一项,或者,该第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示舍弃/忽略其中一项,此处不做限定。Optionally, both steps S400 and S401 can be executed. If the first visibility information received by the first terminal device in step S400 is inconsistent with the first visibility information obtained by the first terminal device in step S401, the first terminal device may arbitrarily discard/ignore one of them, or the first terminal device may discard/ignore one of them based on the instruction of the network device; no limitation is made here.
可选的,可见性信息可以携带区域的标识或终端设备的标识。Optionally, visibility information may carry the identifier of the area or the identifier of the terminal device.
例如,第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备的情况下,该第一可见性信息可以包括第一地理区域的标识。在这种情况下,可见性信息可以理解为区域粒度的可见性信息。For example, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angular intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical region. If the terminal device within the first geographical region includes the first terminal device itself, the first visibility information may include an identifier of the first geographical region. In this case, the visibility information can be understood as regionally granular visibility information.
又如,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量的情况下,该第一可见性信息可以包括第一终端设备的标识。在这种情况下,可见性信息可以理解为终端设备粒度的可见性信息。For example, if the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device and a first terminal device located within one or more spatial angular intervals, the first visibility information may include the identifier of the first terminal device. In this case, the visibility information can be understood as terminal device-level visibility information.
需要说明的是,可见性信息,可以指示网络设备与终端设备之间传输的信号的传输路径的遮挡情况,该遮挡情况可以反映出通信质量。其中,由于NTN通信的入射扩散角比较小,导致NTN小区对应的网络设备与位于地面的终端设备之间的信号遮挡情况对信号传输质量的影响比较大。为此,通信装置可以基于可见性信息确定(或选择)与终端设备进行通信的通信质量较高的一个或多个网络设备,以提升通信效率,例如,可通过如下一种或多种示例实现。It should be noted that visibility information indicates the degree of obstruction in the transmission path of signals between network devices and terminal devices, and this obstruction reflects the communication quality. In particular, because NTN communication has a relatively small incident spread angle, signal obstruction between the network device corresponding to the NTN cell and the terminal device located on the ground has a significant impact on signal transmission quality. Therefore, the communication device can use visibility information to determine (or select) one or more network devices with higher communication quality for communication with the terminal device, thereby improving communication efficiency. This can be achieved, for example, through one or more of the following examples.
例如,终端设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,选择未被遮挡(或遮挡较小)的网络设备,可以减少不必要切换、重选,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices can select network devices that are not blocked (or have only minor blockage) based on signal obstruction, which can reduce unnecessary switching and reselection and improve communication efficiency.
又如,终端设备或网络设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,预测信号中断的发生时刻,提前准备/进行切换至通信质量较高的网络设备,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices or network devices can predict the timing of signal interruptions based on signal obstruction and prepare/switch to network devices with higher communication quality in advance to improve communication efficiency.
又如,终端设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,在合理的位置和/或姿态与通信质量较高的网络设备进行通信,能够提高信号传输的成功率,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices can communicate with network devices of higher quality at reasonable locations and/or in appropriate postures based on signal obstruction, which can improve the success rate of signal transmission and thus enhance communication efficiency.
又如,终端设备可以基于信号遮挡情况,选择未被遮挡(或遮挡较小)的网络设备进行定位,能够提升定位精度,并通过较高的定位精度实现相关通信业务,以提升通信效率。For example, terminal devices can select unobstructed (or less obstructed) network devices for positioning based on signal obstruction, which can improve positioning accuracy and enable related communication services through higher positioning accuracy, thereby improving communication efficiency.
本申请中,可见性信息,可以替换为其它术语,例如NTN通信的可见性信息、遮挡信息、NTN通信的遮挡信息、NTN传输环境信息、长期链路质量信息、或NTN传输路径信息等。In this application, visibility information can be replaced with other terms, such as visibility information of NTN communication, occlusion information, occlusion information of NTN communication, NTN transmission environment information, long-term link quality information, or NTN transmission path information, etc.
示例性的,该可见性信息包括以下任一项:For example, the visibility information includes any of the following:
信息1,指示通信信号的传输路径为可见路径;Information 1 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a visible path;
信息2,指示通信信号的传输路径为不可见路径;Information 2 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is an invisible path;
信息3,指示通信信号的传输路径为视距(line of sight,LOS)路径;Information 3 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a line-of-sight (LOS) path;
信息4,指示通信信号的传输路径为非视距(non-line of sight,NLOS)路径。Information 4 indicates that the transmission path of the communication signal is a non-line of sight (NLOS) path.
可选地,一般情况下,两个通信设备之间的通信路径上的遮挡越少,可以认为该两个通信设备之间的通信质量越高;反之,两个通信设备之间的通信路径上的遮挡越多,可以认为该两个通信设备之间的通信质量越低。为此,上述四项指示信息所指示的四个通信质量从高到低的排序可以为:信息1指示的通信质量(或信息2指示的通信质量)、信息3指示的通信质量、信息4指示的通信质量。Optionally, generally speaking, the fewer obstructions on the communication path between two communication devices, the higher the communication quality between them; conversely, the more obstructions on the communication path between two communication devices, the lower the communication quality. Therefore, the order of the four communication qualities indicated by the above four indications from high to low can be: communication quality indicated by information 1 (or communication quality indicated by information 2), communication quality indicated by information 3, and communication quality indicated by information 4.
可选地,可见性信息指示的通信质量可以是预期的、期望的、或预测的通信质量。即可见性信息用于指示位于该空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于该地理区域内的终端设备之间的预期的、期望的、或预测的通信质量。Optionally, the communication quality indicated by the visibility information can be the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality. That is, the visibility information is used to indicate the expected, anticipated, or predicted communication quality between network devices located within that spatial angular range and terminal devices located within that geographical area.
需要说明的是,LOS路径和NLOS路径可以通过下述一种或多种方式进行识别。It should be noted that LOS paths and NLOS paths can be identified in one or more of the following ways.
方式一、信号强度。Method 1: Signal strength.
其中,信号发送方基于某个发射功率发送的通信信号,该通信信号通过LOS路径传输之后被信号接收方接收对应的信号接收强度,大于该通信信号通过NLOS路径传输之后被信号接收方接收对应的信号接收强度。换言之,第一通信装置可以基于接收的参考信号的信号接收强度确定参考信号的传输路径为LOS路径或NLOS路径。In this context, the communication signal transmitted by the signal transmitter based on a certain transmit power has a received signal strength that is greater than the received signal strength that would be greater if the same communication signal were transmitted via a non-linear communication (NLOS) path. In other words, the first communication device can determine whether the transmission path of the reference signal is an LOS path or an NLOS path based on the received signal strength of the reference signal.
例如,在某个参考信号的信号接收强度大于某个阈值的情况下,第一通信装置可以确定该参考信号是通过LOS路径传输的。For example, if the received signal strength of a reference signal is greater than a certain threshold, the first communication device can determine that the reference signal is transmitted through the LOS path.
又如,在某个参考信号的信号接收强度小于某个阈值的情况下,第一通信装置可以确定该参考信号是通过NLOS路径传输的。For example, if the received signal strength of a reference signal is less than a certain threshold, the first communication device can determine that the reference signal is transmitted through the NLOS path.
可选地,上述阈值可以是网络设备配置的,也可以是预配置的,也可以是基于参考点的信号接收强度确定的期望值。Optionally, the threshold can be configured by the network device, pre-configured, or an expected value determined based on the signal reception strength of a reference point.
方式二、信号传输距离。Method 2: Signal transmission distance.
其中,信号发送方基于某个发射功率发送的通信信号,该通信信号通过LOS路径传输的传输距离,一般是小于或等于该通信信号通过NLOS路径传输的传输距离。换言之,第一通信装置可以基于接收的参考信号的信号衰减信息确定参考信号的传输路径为LOS路径或NLOS路径。In this context, the communication signal transmitted by the signal transmitter based on a certain transmit power has a transmission distance via a LOS path that is generally less than or equal to the transmission distance via an NLOS path. In other words, the first communication device can determine whether the transmission path of the reference signal is an LOS path or an NLOS path based on the signal attenuation information of the received reference signal.
可选地,终端设备可以通过多种参数确定该信号衰减信息,例如网络设备配置的信号传输参数、卫星基站的星历信息、大气传输补偿信息、参考点信息中的一项或多项。Optionally, the terminal device can determine the signal attenuation information through a variety of parameters, such as one or more of the signal transmission parameters configured in the network device, the ephemeris information of the satellite base station, atmospheric transmission compensation information, and reference point information.
方式三、信号的偏移信息,例如,信号的定时偏移率、信号的频率漂移率等。Method 3: Signal offset information, such as signal timing offset rate, signal frequency drift rate, etc.
其中,信号发送方基于某个发射功率发送的通信信号,该通信信号通过LOS路径传输产生的信号漂移,一般是小于或等于该通信信号通过NLOS路径传输产生的信号漂移。换言之,第一通信装置可以基于接收的参考信号对应的信号漂移信息确定参考信号的传输路径为LOS路径或NLOS路径。In this context, the communication signal transmitted by the signal transmitter based on a certain transmit power has a signal drift that is generally less than or equal to the signal drift that is generated when the communication signal is transmitted through a LOS path. In other words, the first communication device can determine whether the transmission path of the reference signal is an LOS path or an NLOS path based on the signal drift information corresponding to the received reference signal.
可选地,终端设备可以通过多种参数确定该信号漂移信息,例如网络设备配置的信号传输参数、卫星基站的星历信息、大气传输补偿信息、参考点信息中的一项或多项。Optionally, the terminal device can determine the signal drift information through a variety of parameters, such as one or more of the following: signal transmission parameters configured by the network device, ephemeris information of the satellite base station, atmospheric transmission compensation information, and reference point information.
为了便于理解,下面将以可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于一个或多个地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量为例,结合一些实现示例进行说明。在下述示例中,以一个或多个空间角度区间为N个子区间,一个或多个地理区域为M个子区域为例;其中,可见性信息包括P个信息,相应的,该P个第一子信息分别用于指示P个通信质量;在该P个第一子信息中,任一子信息用于指示该空间角度区间包含的N个子区间中的其中一个子区间内的网络设备,与位于该地理区域包含的M个子区域中的其中一个子区域内的终端设备的通信质量,N、M、P均为正整数。To facilitate understanding, the following example uses visibility information to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angular intervals and a terminal device located within one or more geographical regions, along with some implementation examples. In the following example, one or more spatial angular intervals are considered as N sub-intervals, and one or more geographical regions are considered as M sub-regions. The visibility information includes P pieces of information, and correspondingly, each of these P first pieces of information indicates a communication quality. In these P first pieces of information, any one of the pieces of information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one of the N sub-intervals contained in the spatial angular interval and a terminal device located within one of the M sub-regions contained in the geographical region. N, M, and P are all positive integers.
应理解,P个第一子信息分别用于指示P个通信质量,可以理解为,P个第一子信息与P个通信质量一一对应,或者,P个第一子信息中的第p个第一子信息用于指示P个通信质量中的第p个通信质量,p为1至P。It should be understood that the P first sub-information pieces are used to indicate the P communication quality, which can be understood as a one-to-one correspondence between the P first sub-information pieces and the P communication quality, or that the p-th first sub-information piece among the P first sub-information pieces is used to indicate the p-th communication quality among the P communication quality, where p is from 1 to P.
可选地,该可见性信息还包括以下信息A至信息E中的至少一项。Optionally, the visibility information may also include at least one of the following information A through information E.
信息A.N个第二子信息,该N个第二子信息分别用于指示该N个子区间。Information A. N second sub-information pieces, each of which is used to indicate one of the N sub-intervals.
信息B.M个第三子信息,该M个第三子信息分别用于指示该M个子区域。Information B.M third sub-information, each of which is used to indicate one of the M sub-regions.
信息C.X个第四子信息,该X个第四子信息分别用于指示该P个第一子信息中的X个第一子信息的置信度,X小于或等于P。Information C.X fourth sub-information, which are used to indicate the confidence level of X first sub-information among P first sub-information, where X is less than or equal to P.
信息D.Y个第五子信息,该Y个第五子信息分别用于指示该P个第一子信息中的Y个第一子信息为有效信息的时间信息,Y小于或等于P。Information D.Y fifth sub-information, which are used to indicate the time information of Y first sub-information among P first sub-information as valid information, where Y is less than or equal to P.
信息E.Z个第六子信息,该Z个第六子信息分别用于指示该P个第一子信息中的Z个第一子信息指示的通信质量与参考点的通信质量的差异信息,Z小于或等于P。Information E.Z sixth sub-information, which are used to indicate the difference between the communication quality indicated by the Z first sub-information in the P first sub-information and the communication quality of the reference point, where Z is less than or equal to P.
具体地,第一通信装置还可以通过上述至少一项获得更多的信息,能够辅助该第一通信装置快速确定与第一终端设备进行通信的一个或多个网络设备。Specifically, the first communication device can also obtain more information through at least one of the above methods, which can help the first communication device quickly identify one or more network devices communicating with the first terminal device.
可选地,上述信息A至信息E中的至少一项可以承载于不同于可见性信息的其它消息/信令/信息。Optionally, at least one of the above information A to information E may be carried in other messages/signaling/information that are different from visibility information.
或者,上述信息A至信息E中的至少一项可以是预配置的。Alternatively, at least one of the above information A through information E may be pre-configured.
例如,可见性信息不携带信息A的情况下,可见性信息包含的P个第一子信息对应的空间区域可以是预配置的,例如该空间区域为发送可见性信息的卫星基站所处的空间区域。For example, if the visibility information does not carry information A, the spatial regions corresponding to the P first sub-informations contained in the visibility information can be pre-configured, such as the spatial region where the satellite base station transmitting the visibility information is located.
又如,可见性信息不携带信息B的情况下,可见性信息包含的P个第一子信息对应的地理区域可以是预配置的,例如该空间区域为接收到可见性信息的终端设备所处的空间区域。For example, if the visibility information does not carry information B, the geographical regions corresponding to the P first sub-information contained in the visibility information can be pre-configured, such as the spatial region where the terminal device receiving the visibility information is located.
又如,可见性信息不携带信息C的情况下,可见性信息包含的P个第一子信息可以按照先后排序的方式隐式指示各个第一子信息的置信度。For example, if visibility information does not carry information C, the P first sub-information pieces contained in the visibility information can implicitly indicate the confidence level of each first sub-information piece in a sequential order.
又如,可见性信息不携带信息D的情况下,可见性信息包含的P个第一子信息为有效信息的起始时刻可以为终端设备接收该可见性信息的时刻,该P个第一子信息为有效信息的持续时长可以是预配置的。For example, if the visibility information does not carry information D, the start time when the P first sub-information contained in the visibility information is valid can be the time when the terminal device receives the visibility information, and the duration for which the P first sub-information is valid can be pre-configured.
又如,可见性信息不携带信息E的情况下,可见性信息包含的P个第一子信息指示的通信质量,与预配置的参考点的通信质量之间的差异是低于阈值的。For example, if the visibility information does not carry information E, the difference between the communication quality indicated by the P first sub-information contained in the visibility information and the communication quality of the pre-configured reference point is below a threshold.
需要说明的是,可见性信息可以通过表格、公式、不同字段含义等多种方式指示空间角度区间、可见性信息、地理区域之间的关联关系,下面将以可见性信息通过表格的形式指示该关联关系为例,进行说明。It should be noted that visibility information can indicate the relationship between spatial angle ranges, visibility information, and geographical regions in various ways, such as tables, formulas, and different field meanings. The following will use the example of visibility information indicating this relationship in the form of a table to illustrate the relationship.
作为一种示例,可见性信息通过表4所示示例,指示空间角度区间、可见性信息、地理区域之间的关联关系。表4中,第一列信息为前文信息A,第二列信息为前文的“P个第一子信息”,第三列信息为信息C。As an example, visibility information, as shown in Table 4, indicates the relationship between spatial angle intervals, visibility information, and geographical regions. In Table 4, the first column contains information A from the preceding text, the second column contains "P first sub-information items" from the preceding text, and the third column contains information C.
表4
Table 4
在表4中,第一列对应“空间角度区间”、第二列对应“可见性信息”、第三列对应“地理区域”。其中,位于同一行的不同列的信息表示该不同列的信息之间存在关联关系,第二列的可见性信息是以是否可见为例进行说明(例如取值为“1”表示可见,取值为“0”表示不可见)。例如,第一行信息表示,位于“空间区域#1”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“可见(取值为1)”,该可见性信息指示的通信质量较高。又如,第二行信息表示,位于“空间区域#2”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“不可见(取值为0)”,该可见性信息指示的通信质量较低。In Table 4, the first column corresponds to "Spatial Angle Range," the second column to "Visibility Information," and the third column to "Geographic Region." Information from different columns within the same row indicates a relationship between the information in those columns. The visibility information in the second column is explained using visibility as an example (e.g., a value of "1" indicates visibility, and a value of "0" indicates invisibility). For example, the first row indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and a terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "Visible (value 1)," indicating high communication quality. Conversely, the second row indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #2" and a terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "Invisible (value 0)," indicating low communication quality.
可选地,表4中的空间角度区间的描述可离散成不同的区间,如表5所示。Optionally, the descriptions of the spatial angle intervals in Table 4 can be discretized into different intervals, as shown in Table 5.
表5
Table 5
在表5中,方位角和天顶角可以通过东-北-天(east north up,ENU)坐标系确定,ENU坐标系也可以称为站心坐标系。In Table 5, the azimuth and zenith angles can be determined using the east-north-up (ENU) coordinate system, which can also be called the station center coordinate system.
一种示例中,在ENU坐标系中,以地球为椭球为例,可以以终端设备所处位置为站心(即坐标系原点O),z轴与椭球的法线重合,向上为正(即天向);y与椭球的短半轴重合(即北(north)向);x轴与地球椭球的长半轴重合(即东(east)向)所构成的直角坐标系。相应的,对于位于地面的终端设备与位于空中的卫星基站之间的连接线,天顶角可以为该连接线与z轴之间的夹角,方位角可以为该连接线在地面的投影与x轴(或y轴)之间的夹角。In one example, within the ENU coordinate system, taking the Earth as an ellipsoid, a rectangular coordinate system can be formed with the location of the terminal device as the station center (i.e., the origin O of the coordinate system), the z-axis coinciding with the normal to the ellipsoid (positive, i.e., celestial direction); the y-axis coinciding with the minor semi-axis of the ellipsoid (i.e., north direction); and the x-axis coinciding with the major semi-axis of the Earth ellipsoid (i.e., east direction). Correspondingly, for the connection line between the ground-based terminal device and the satellite base station in the air, the zenith angle can be the angle between the connection line and the z-axis, and the azimuth angle can be the angle between the projection of the connection line onto the ground and the x-axis (or y-axis).
可选地,除了表5所示的方位角和天顶角之外,还可以通过其它信息配置空间角度区间。例如,通过配置地心地固坐标系中,以地心为圆心,配置空间区域的坐标参数。又如,配置上述方位角、天顶角、坐标参数对应的索引、标识等。又如,配置某一地理区域(例如该地理区域可以通过前文术语介绍中的波位、区域索引、区域编号等方式进行配置)之后,将位于该地理区域上空的某个高度的空间范围配置为空间角度区间所表示的空间区域。Optionally, in addition to the azimuth and zenith angles shown in Table 5, other information can be used to configure spatial angle intervals. For example, coordinate parameters of a spatial region can be configured in a geocentric coordinate system with the Earth's center as the center. Another example is configuring the indexes and identifiers corresponding to the aforementioned azimuth, zenith angles, and coordinate parameters. Yet another example is configuring a specific geographic region (e.g., this geographic region can be configured using wave position, region index, region number, etc., as described in the previous terminology introduction), and then configuring the spatial range at a certain altitude above that geographic region as the spatial region represented by the spatial angle interval.
可选地,表4中的地理区域的描述可离散成不同的区间,如表6所示。Optionally, the descriptions of the geographical regions in Table 4 can be discretized into different intervals, as shown in Table 6.
表6
Table 6
可选地,除了表6所示的经度区间、维度区间、海拔区间之外,还可以通过其它信息配置地理区域。例如,在地理区域为圆形区域的情况下,可以通过配置的参考点的坐标作为圆心,配置的长度值作为圆的直径或半径;又如,在地理区域为矩形区域的情况下,可以通过配置的矩形的四个顶点的坐标。又如,该地理区域还可以为六边形,五边形,椭圆等规则图形、或不规则图形,可以配置该规则或不规则图形的轮廓线的坐标。又如,该地理区域可以通过前文术语介绍中的波位、区域索引、区域编号等方式进行配置。Optionally, in addition to the longitude, latitude, and altitude intervals shown in Table 6, other information can be used to configure the geographic region. For example, if the geographic region is circular, the coordinates of a configured reference point can be used as the center, and the configured length value can be used as the diameter or radius of the circle. Similarly, if the geographic region is rectangular, the coordinates of the four vertices of the rectangle can be configured. Furthermore, the geographic region can also be a regular shape such as a hexagon, pentagon, or ellipse, or an irregular shape, and the coordinates of the outline of the regular or irregular shape can be configured. Additionally, the geographic region can be configured using wave position, region index, region number, etc., as described in the previous terminology introduction.
示例性的,以位于某一地理区域的设备为UE为例,一般地,UE所处的海拔高度越高,UE与卫星基站之间的遮挡物就越少,为此,同一经纬坐标下,高度较高的UE可见的天空范围更多,因此表6所示的“海拔区间”的描述也可使用“>x(x为实数)m”的形式。For example, taking a device located in a certain geographical area as a UE, generally, the higher the altitude of the UE, the fewer the obstructions between the UE and the satellite base station. Therefore, under the same latitude and longitude coordinates, the higher the altitude of the UE, the more sky range can be seen. Thus, the description of the "altitude range" shown in Table 6 can also be in the form of ">x (x is a real number) m.
作为另一种示例,表4中的可见性信息以其它形式实现,例如,下述表7中,可见性信息以“是否为LOS”为例进行说明(例如取值为“1”表示LOS,取值为“0”表示NLOS)。As another example, the visibility information in Table 4 is implemented in other forms. For example, in Table 7 below, the visibility information is illustrated by the example of "whether it is LOS" (for example, a value of "1" indicates LOS, and a value of "0" indicates NLOS).
表7
Table 7
例如,表7中的第一行信息表示,位于“空间区域#1”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“LOS(取值为1)”,该可见性信息指示的通信质量较高。又如,第二行信息表示,位于“空间区域#2”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“NLOS(取值为0)”,该可见性信息指示的通信质量较低。For example, the first row of information in Table 7 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "LOS (value is 1)", which indicates a high communication quality. Similarly, the second row indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #2" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "NLOS (value is 0)", which indicates a low communication quality.
作为另一种示例,表4中还可以包括前文描述的信息C,如下述表8中的最后一列。As another example, Table 4 may also include the information C described above, as shown in the last column of Table 8 below.
表8
Table 8
例如,表8的第一行信息表示,位于“空间区域#1”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“可见(取值为1)”,该可见性信息的置信度取值为1,表示该可见性信息的置信度较高。又如,表8的第三行信息表示,位于“空间区域#3”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“可见(取值为1)”,该可见性信息的置信度取值为0,表示该可见性信息的置信度较低。For example, the first row of Table 8 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "visible (value 1)", and the confidence level of this visibility information is 1, indicating that the confidence level of this visibility information is high. Similarly, the third row of Table 8 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #3" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "visible (value 1)", and the confidence level of this visibility information is 0, indicating that the confidence level of this visibility information is low.
作为另一种示例,表4中还可以包括前文描述的信息D,如下述表9中的最后一列。As another example, Table 4 may also include the information D described above, as shown in the last column of Table 9 below.
表9
Table 9
例如,表9的第一行信息表示,位于“空间区域#1”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息的维持有效的时长为“1天”,表示该可见性信息的将在1天后失效。又如,表9的第四行信息表示,位于“空间区域#1”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#2”的终端设备之间的可见性信息的维持有效的时长为“1年”,表示该可见性信息的将在1年后失效。For example, the first row of Table 9 indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and a terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is valid for "1 day," meaning that the visibility information will expire after 1 day. Similarly, the fourth row of Table 9 indicates that the visibility information between a network device located in "Spatial Region #1" and a terminal device located in "Geographic Region #2" is valid for "1 year," meaning that the visibility information will expire after 1 year.
作为另一种示例,表4中还可以包括前文描述的信息D,如下述表10中的最后两列。As another example, Table 4 may also include the information D described above, as shown in the last two columns of Table 10 below.
表10
Table 10
例如,表10的第三行信息表示,位于“空间区域#3”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#1”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“NLOS(取值为2)”,并且,在[1GHz~3GHz]对应的频域资源进行通信的过程中,该终端设备与位于参考点的终端设备相比的额外损耗为10dB。For example, the information in the third row of Table 10 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #3" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #1" is "NLOS (value is 2)", and that during communication in the frequency domain resources corresponding to [1GHz~3GHz], the additional loss of the terminal device compared to the terminal device located at the reference point is 10dB.
又如,表10的第四行信息表示,位于“空间区域#4”的网络设备与位于“地理区域#2”的终端设备之间的可见性信息为“NLOS(取值为2)”,并且,在6GHz及以上对应的频域资源进行通信的过程中,该终端设备与位于参考点的终端设备相比的额外损耗为20dB。For example, the fourth row of Table 10 indicates that the visibility information between the network device located in "Spatial Region #4" and the terminal device located in "Geographic Region #2" is "NLOS (value is 2)". Furthermore, during communication in the frequency domain resources corresponding to 6 GHz and above, the additional loss of this terminal device compared to the terminal device located at the reference point is 20 dB.
应理解,M的取值1的情况下,上述可见性信息即为第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角It should be understood that when M is 1, the aforementioned visibility information is the first visibility information used to indicate a location at one or more spatial angles. 度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量(即区域粒度)的实现示例。An example of implementing communication quality (i.e., regional granularity) between network devices within a degree interval and terminal devices located in the first geographical region.
应理解,上述表4、表7、表8、表9等示例中,地理区域所在列替换为终端设备,即为第一可见性It should be understood that in the examples in Tables 4, 7, 8, and 9 above, the column indicating the geographic region is replaced with the terminal device, which represents the first visibility. 信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量(即终端设备The information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device and a first terminal device located within one or more spatial angular intervals (i.e., the terminal device). 粒度)的实现示例。Example of implementation at the granular level.
S402.第一终端设备基于第一可见性信息,确定第一参考信号(reference signal,RS)对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长;其中,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测(beam failure detection,BFD)的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。S402. The first terminal device determines, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein, the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
应理解,一个RS对应的网络设备,可以理解为,提供或发送该RS的网络设备。可选的,该RS的资源可以是该网络设备配置的,也可以是其它网络设备配置的,此处不做限定。It should be understood that the network device corresponding to an RS can be understood as the network device that provides or transmits the RS. Optionally, the resources of the RS can be configured by the network device itself or by other network devices; this is not limited here.
需要说明的是,网络设备向某个终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,可以理解为,当前时刻与该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻之间的时间间隔,或,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的起始时刻与该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻之间的时间间隔,或,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻与最迟启动测量的时刻之间的时间间隔。It should be noted that the remaining service duration of a network device providing services to a terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the current time and the time when the network device stops providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the start time and the end time of the network device providing services to the terminal device, or the time interval between the end time and the latest time when the measurement was started.
可选的,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻,也可以理解为,该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的截止时刻,即该网络设备将会在该截止时刻停止(或暂停)为该终端设备提供的服务。Optionally, the termination time of the network device's service to the terminal device can also be understood as the cutoff time of the network device's service to the terminal device, that is, the network device will stop (or suspend) the service provided to the terminal device at the cutoff time.
可选的,剩余服务时长可以替换为其它术语,例如,剩余可服务时长、剩余可用时长、剩余通信时长、或剩余可通信时长等。Optionally, the remaining service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as remaining serviceable duration, remaining available duration, remaining communication duration, or remaining communication duration.
在上述方案中,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,可以理解为,可见性信息可以用于确定剩余服务时长。In the above scheme, the first terminal device can determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. It can be understood that the visibility information can be used to determine the remaining service duration.
例如,第一可见性信息可以用于选择/确定第一时间段,其中,该第一时间段可以包含可见的一个或多个时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量优于阈值的一个或多个时间段(即排除第二时间段,该第二时间段可以包含不可见的时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量较差的时间段)。此外,在该第一时间段中,从当前时刻开始,满足下述一个或多个条件的时间段的总时长可以为剩余服务时长:For example, first visibility information can be used to select/determine a first time period, wherein the first time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods indicated by the visibility information with communication quality better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a second time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods indicated by the visibility information with poor communication quality). Furthermore, within this first time period, the total duration of time periods satisfying one or more of the following conditions, starting from the current time, can be the remaining service duration:
条件1.预期的仰角大于仰角阈值的时长;Condition 1. The duration during which the expected elevation angle is greater than the elevation angle threshold;
条件2.预期的信号接收强度大于阈值的时长;Condition 2. The duration for which the expected signal reception strength is greater than the threshold;
条件3.预期的信道传输的损耗(该损耗可以根据终端设备与网络设备之间的相对位置、距离、频点等参数确定)小于阈值的时长。Condition 3. The expected channel transmission loss (which can be determined based on parameters such as the relative position, distance, and frequency between the terminal device and the network device) is less than the threshold for a certain duration.
可以理解的是,上述条件1至条件3的涉及的参数(例如预期的仰角、预期的信号接收强度、预期的信道传输的损耗等)可以依据网络设备的星历信息确定。在满足上述一个或多个条件的时间段中,网络设备可以为终端设备提供服务(或提供较优的服务),相应的,网络设备为终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长可以基于上述一个或多个条件确定。It is understood that the parameters involved in conditions 1 to 3 above (such as the expected elevation angle, expected signal reception strength, expected channel transmission loss, etc.) can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the network device. During the time period in which one or more of the above conditions are met, the network device can provide services (or provide better services) to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the remaining service duration for the network device to provide services to the terminal device can be determined based on one or more of the above conditions.
需要说明的是,剩余服务时长用于在波束失败前的波束恢复,可以理解为:剩余服务时长用于在波束失败前的抢先恢复,或者,可以理解为,剩余服务时长可以用于判断当前波束(即第一RS对应的波束)是否即将发生波束失败,或者,剩余服务时长可以为该网络设备向该终端设备提供服务的终止时刻之前的一段时长。换言之,剩余服务时长用于波束失败恢复,可以替换为,剩余服务时长用于波束失败判决、用于确定波束是否即将失败,用于触发波束失败恢复,或,用于确定是否发生波束失败事件等。It should be noted that the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. This can be understood as: the remaining service duration is used for preemptive recovery before beam failure; or, it can be understood as: the remaining service duration can be used to determine whether the current beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the first RS) is about to fail; or, the remaining service duration can be a period of time before the network device terminates its service to the terminal device. In other words, the remaining service duration for beam failure recovery can be replaced by: the remaining service duration being used for beam failure determination, determining whether a beam is about to fail, triggering beam failure recovery, or determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, etc.
在图4所示方法的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该第一RS。换言之,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的配置,接收用于波束失败探测的第一RS,使得终端设备能够基于网络设备的配置实现波束失败探测的过程。In one possible implementation of the method shown in Figure 4, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving second configuration information, which is used to configure the first RS. In other words, the first terminal device can receive the first RS for beam failure detection based on the configuration of the network device, enabling the terminal device to implement the beam failure detection process based on the configuration of the network device.
可选的,在图4所示方法中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收用于指示第一阈值的指示信息;其中,该剩余服务时长和该第一阈值用于波束失败恢复。换言之,第一终端设备可以接收用于指示第一阈值的指示信息,使得该第一终端设备可以基于该剩余服务时长和该第一阈值执行波束失败恢复。Optionally, in the method shown in Figure 4, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving indication information for indicating a first threshold; wherein the remaining service duration and the first threshold are used for beam failure recovery. In other words, the first terminal device can receive indication information for indicating the first threshold, so that the first terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on the remaining service duration and the first threshold.
例如,该第一阈值取值为100毫秒、500毫秒、1秒、2秒、3秒、5秒、或10秒等,或者,该第一阈值可以为其它的时间取值。For example, the first threshold can be 100 milliseconds, 500 milliseconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds, or the first threshold can be other time values.
可选的,第一阈值可以是标准/协议预配置的。Optionally, the first threshold can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
可选的,在该剩余服务时长低于或等于该第一阈值的情况下,第一终端设备可以确定第一RS对应的波束即将或已经发生波束失败(或第一RS对应的网络设备向第一终端设备提供的服务即将或已经发生中断),为此,第一终端设备可以发送波束恢复请求信息,以通过波束恢复请求信息实现通信波束的恢复。Optionally, if the remaining service duration is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first terminal device may determine that the beam corresponding to the first RS is about to or has already failed (or the service provided by the network device corresponding to the first RS to the first terminal device is about to or has already been interrupted). To this end, the first terminal device may send a beam recovery request message to restore the communication beam.
可选的,波束恢复请求信息可以包括终端设备在波束失败恢复(beam failure recovery,BFR)流程发送的信息,例如链路恢复请求(link recovery request,LRR)、发送指示BFR的介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)控制单元(control element,CE)、或随机接入请求。Optionally, the beam recovery request information may include information sent by the terminal device during the beam failure recovery (BFR) process, such as a link recovery request (LRR), a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE) sending an indication of BFR, or a random access request.
基于图4所示方法方案,第一终端设备获取的第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与特定的终端设备之间的通信质量,该特定的终端设备可以包括位于第一地理区域内的任一终端设备,或,该第一终端设备自身。此后,该第一终端设备在步骤S402中可以基于该第一可见性信息确定用于波束失败探测的RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,并且,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定网络设备的剩余服务时长,该服务剩余时长可以用于波束失败恢复。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行波束失败恢复,能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the method shown in Figure 4, the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device. This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself. Subsequently, in step S402, the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure detection, and this remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device, and this remaining service duration can be used for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level, which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal obstruction of the network device, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
作为一种示例,以图5和图6所示场景为例。在图5中,在某个地面区域中包含位置不同的4个终端设备,分别为UE#1,UE#2,UE#3,UE#4,在该示例中,以不同UE之间的间隔为5米(m)为例。在网络设备为卫星的情况下,由前文可见性信息的描述可知,卫星与UE之间的信号传输容易受到信号遮挡的影响。而对于同一卫星而言,地面不同位置上的可见性信息是不同的。As an example, consider the scenarios shown in Figures 5 and 6. In Figure 5, there are four terminal devices located at different positions within a certain ground area: UE#1, UE#2, UE#3, and UE#4. In this example, the interval between the different UEs is 5 meters (m). When the network device is a satellite, as described above regarding visibility information, signal transmission between the satellite and the UEs is easily affected by signal obstruction. Furthermore, for the same satellite, the visibility information differs at different locations on the ground.
如图6所示,分别为同一卫星与图5所示的4个终端设备之间的信号遮挡情况,在图6中,以地面区域为圆形区域为例,灰色填充区域为该网络设备对应的不可见区域,非灰色填充区域为该网络设备对应的可见区域。由该实现示例可以看出,在地面区域中,相距5m的终端设备对应的可见性信息往往存在比较大的差异。换言之,在某个时刻,一个NTN小区的参考信号接收强度较强,并不意味着在后续的一个或多个时刻上,该NTN小区的参考信号接收强度仍能保持较强的水平,这就导致仅通过信号接收强度进行波束管理(例如判断当前波束是否发生波束失败事件的过程、在多个候选波束中选择目标波束的过程)的实现过程中,由于基于信号接收强度所选的波束可能在短时间内再次被遮挡,导致频繁的波束恢复过程,并产生波束中断和不必要的开销,进而影响通信效率。Figure 6 illustrates the signal obstruction between the same satellite and the four terminal devices shown in Figure 5. In Figure 6, taking the ground area as a circular region, the gray-filled area represents the invisible area corresponding to the network device, while the non-gray-filled area represents the visible area. This example demonstrates that in the ground area, the visibility information of terminal devices spaced 5 meters apart often varies significantly. In other words, a strong reference signal reception strength in an NTN cell at a given moment does not guarantee that the strong signal reception strength will remain strong at subsequent moments. This leads to frequent beam recovery processes in beam management based solely on signal reception strength (e.g., determining whether a beam failure event has occurred, or selecting a target beam from multiple candidate beams). Because the selected beam may be obstructed again within a short period, beam recovery becomes frequent, resulting in beam interruptions and unnecessary overhead, ultimately impacting communication efficiency.
而在图4所示方法中,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行波束失败恢复,能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。In the method shown in Figure 4, the terminal device can perform beam failure recovery based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level. This can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
在图4所示方法的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测(candidate beam detection,CBD);其中,该波束恢复请求信息关联于第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第二RS是基于该第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定的RS。In one possible implementation of the method shown in Figure 4, the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving first configuration information, the first configuration information being used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection (CBD); wherein the beam recovery request information is associated with a second RS, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the second RS is an RS determined from the L RSs based on the first visibility information.
具体地,第一终端设备还可以接收用于配置候选波束检测的L个RS的第一配置信息,并且,该第一终端设备可以基于第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定第二RS。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Specifically, the first terminal device can also receive first configuration information for configuring L RSs for candidate beam detection, and the first terminal device can determine a second RS among the L RSs based on first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, and improve beam management efficiency.
应理解,波束恢复请求信息关联于第二RS,可以理解为,第二RS用于确定波束恢复请求信息。例如,终端设备可以基于第二RS发送波束恢复请求信息。It should be understood that the beam recovery request information is associated with the second RS, which can be understood as the second RS being used to determine the beam recovery request information. For example, the terminal device can send the beam recovery request information based on the second RS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在确定用于波束故障恢复的RS之前,上述方法还可以包括:该第一终端设备接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示用于波束故障恢复的RS满足第一条件,该第一条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation, before determining the RS for beam fault recovery, the method may further include: the first terminal device receiving first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery satisfies a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于阈值(例如,该阈值取值为10秒、30秒、1分钟、或2分钟等,或者,该阈值可以为其它的时间取值);In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold (e.g., the threshold is 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes, or the threshold can be other time values).
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值(例如,该阈值取值为10秒、30秒、1分钟、或2分钟等,或者,该阈值可以为其它的时间取值)。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold (e.g., the threshold is 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes, or the threshold can be other time values).
从而,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS(即第二RS)。Thus, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS (i.e., the second RS) for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
可选的,第一条件可以是标准/协议预配置的。Optionally, the first condition can be pre-configured by the standard/protocol.
可选的,第一指示信息与第一配置信息可以承载于同一消息/信令,或者,第一指示信息与后文描述的第二配置信息可以承载于同一消息/信令。Optionally, the first indication information and the first configuration information may be carried in the same message/signaling, or the first indication information and the second configuration information described below may be carried in the same message/signaling.
需要说明的是,可服务时长可以是基于第一可见性信息确定的。例如,对于第一终端设备而言,网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的可服务时长,可以理解为,第一可见性信息指示该网络设备相对该第一终端设备是可见的(或第一可见性信息指示该网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的通信质量优于阈值)的过程中,起始时刻与终止时刻时间的时间间隔。It should be noted that the service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information. For example, for a first terminal device, the service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the time interval between the start and end times during the process in which the first visibility information indicates that the network device is visible to the first terminal device (or the first visibility information indicates that the communication quality of the network device providing services to the first terminal device is better than a threshold).
相应的,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定一个RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的可服务时长。例如,第一可见性信息可以用于选择/确定第三时间段,其中,该第三时间段可以包含可见的一个或多个时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量优于阈值的一个或多个时间段(即排除第四时间段,该第四时间段可以包含不可见的时间段,或,可见性信息指示的通信质量较差的时间段)。此外,在该第三时间段中,满足一个或多个条件的时间段的总时长可以为可服务时长,该一个或多个条件可以包括上文描述的条件1至条件3中的一项或多项。Accordingly, the first terminal device can determine the serviceable duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. For example, the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a third time period, wherein the third time period may include one or more visible time periods, or one or more time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is better than a threshold (i.e., excluding a fourth time period, which may include invisible time periods, or time periods whose communication quality indicated by the visibility information is poor). In addition, within the third time period, the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the serviceable duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
可选的,可服务时长可以替换为其它术语,例如,有效服务时间、有效服务时长、有效可通信时长、或有效通信时长等。Optionally, service duration can be replaced with other terms, such as effective service time, effective service duration, effective communication duration, or effective communication duration.
类似地,过顶累计服务时长可以是基于第一可见性信息确定的。例如,对于第一终端设备而言,网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的过顶累计服务时长,可以理解为,第一可见性信息指示该网络设备相对该第一终端设备处于过顶的过程中,包含的一个或多个时间段(可选的,不同时间段可以是不连续的)的总时长。Similarly, the cumulative overpass service duration can be determined based on the first visibility information. For example, for a first terminal device, the cumulative overpass service duration for which the network device provides services to the first terminal device can be understood as the total duration of one or more time periods (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous) included in the process of the network device being overpassed relative to the first terminal device, as indicated by the first visibility information.
相应的,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定一个RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的过顶累计服务时长。例如,第一可见性信息可以用于选择/确定第五时间段,其中,该第五时间段可以包含网络设备相对该第一终端设备处于过顶的过程中的第五时间段,该第五时间段包含的一个或多个时间段(可选的,不同时间段可以是不连续的)的总时长。此外,在该第五时间段中,满足一个或多个条件的时间段的总时长可以为过顶累计服务时长,该一个或多个条件可以包括上文描述的条件1至条件3中的一项或多项。Accordingly, the first terminal device can determine the cumulative overpass service duration for a network device corresponding to an RS to provide services to the first terminal device based on the first visibility information. For example, the first visibility information can be used to select/determine a fifth time period, wherein the fifth time period can include a fifth time period in which the network device is in the process of overpassing relative to the first terminal device, and the total duration of one or more time periods included in the fifth time period (optionally, different time periods may be discontinuous). In addition, within the fifth time period, the total duration of time periods that satisfy one or more conditions can be the cumulative overpass service duration, and the one or more conditions may include one or more of conditions 1 to 3 described above.
可选的,过顶累计服务时长可以替换为其它术语,例如,过顶累计服务时间、过顶累计有效服务时长、过顶累计通信时长或过顶累计可通信时长等。Optionally, the cumulative service duration over the top can be replaced with other terms, such as cumulative service time over the top, cumulative effective service duration over the top, cumulative communication duration over the top, or cumulative communicable duration over the top.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在确定用于波束故障恢复的RS之前,上述方法还可以包括:该第一终端设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息指示用于波束失败恢复的RS满足第二条件,该第二条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation, before determining the RS for beam failure recovery, the method may further include: the first terminal device receiving second indication information indicating that the RS for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备位于该第一终端设备的过顶的空间角度区域时的预期信号强度大于或等于阈值;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS的信号强度大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
从而,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定预期信号强度较强的RS作为用于波束故障恢复的RS(即第二RS),能够提升基于该用于波束故障恢复的RS进行通信的通信质量。Therefore, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery (i.e., the second RS) based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
需要说明的是,预期信号强度可以是基于第一可见性信息确定的。例如,对于第一终端设备而言,网络设备向该第一终端设备发送的信号的预期信号强度,可以理解为,该网络设备在未来的某个时刻(或某个时间段)向该终端设备发送的信号的预期的信号强度,或,终端设备在未来的某个时刻接收到的信号的强度。It should be noted that the expected signal strength can be determined based on the first visibility information. For example, for a first terminal device, the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the first terminal device can be understood as the expected signal strength of the signal sent by the network device to the terminal device at a certain time in the future (or a certain time period), or the strength of the signal received by the terminal device at a certain time in the future.
示例性的,第一终端设备可以基于该第一可见性信息确定某个网络设备与该第一终端设备之间,在未来的某个时刻(或某个时间段)是可见的(或,第一可见性信息指示的通信质量优于阈值)。此外,该第一终端设备可以接收该网络设备在当前时刻(或历史时刻)的信号的第一信号强度,相应的,该第一终端设备可以基于该第一信号强度预测该网络设备在上述未来的某个时刻(或某个时间段)的第二信号强度,即该第二信号强度为预期的信号强度。For example, the first terminal device can determine, based on the first visibility information, that a network device and the first terminal device will be visible to each other at a future time (or a certain time period) (or, the communication quality indicated by the first visibility information is better than a threshold). Furthermore, the first terminal device can receive a first signal strength of the network device's signal at the current time (or a historical time), and correspondingly, the first terminal device can predict a second signal strength of the network device at the aforementioned future time (or a certain time period) based on the first signal strength, i.e., the second signal strength is the expected signal strength.
可选的,第一终端设备基于第一信号强度进行预测得到第二信号强度的过程中,预测的依据可以包括上述第一可见性信息、网络设备与第一终端设备之间的路损变化信息(例如通过网络设备与第一终端设备之间的相对位置确定)、网络设备所处卫星的等效全向辐射功率(equivalent isotropically radiated power,EIRP)信息等。Optionally, in the process of the first terminal device predicting the second signal strength based on the first signal strength, the basis for the prediction may include the aforementioned first visibility information, the path loss change information between the network device and the first terminal device (e.g., determined by the relative position between the network device and the first terminal device), the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) information of the satellite where the network device is located, etc.
可选的,上述信号强度,可以为参考信号接收强度(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)。Optionally, the above signal strength can be the reference signal receiving power (RSRP).
可选的,上述信号强度,可以替换为其它用于表征信号接收质量的参数,例如参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)。Optionally, the signal strength mentioned above can be replaced with other parameters used to characterize signal reception quality, such as reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ).
在一种可能的实现方式中,用于候选波束探测的L个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;在确定用于波束故障恢复的RS之前,上述方法还可以包括:该第一终端设备接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示以下至少一项:In one possible implementation, the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; before determining the RSs used for beam fault recovery, the method may further include: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
在该K组RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS为同一组内的不同RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In this group of K RSs, the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
在该K组RS中,在与用于波束失败探测的RS位于同一组内的其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS分别为不同组的RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;或In the K groups of RSs, if the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to other RSs in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection is less than the threshold, then the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
在该K组RS中,任一RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS为可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长最长的网络设备对应的RS。In the K groups of RSs, if the available service time or the cumulative available service time of the network device corresponding to any RS is less than the threshold, the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
从而,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,优先在与用于波束失败探测的RS相同组内的用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS,由于同一组内的不同RS对应的不同网络设备可能是具备关联关系的,通过这种方式,使能终端设备尽量在容易建立星间链的卫星波束间进行恢复操作,减少星间交互开销。Thus, the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection within the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group may be related, this enables the terminal device to perform recovery operations between satellite beams where inter-satellite links can be easily established, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
可选的,上述第一指示信息、第二指示信息、第三指示信息可以承载于同一消息/信令/信息,也可以承载于不同消息/信令/信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, the first instruction information, the second instruction information, and the third instruction information mentioned above may be carried in the same message/signaling/information or in different messages/signaling/information; no limitation is made here.
可选的,该用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该K组RS中同一组内的不同RS可以是具备关联关系的,例如,该K组RS满足以下任一项:Optionally, the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; different RSs within the same group of the K groups of RSs can be correlated, for example, the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨道是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨道是不同的;Within these K groups of RSs, the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是不同的;或Within these K groups of RSs, the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备之间的距离小于阈值,不同组的RS对应的网络设备之间的距离大于阈值。In the K groups of RS, the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
从而,用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS可以通过上述任一项实现分组,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Thus, one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection can be grouped using any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the scheme implementation.
请参阅图7,为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to Figure 7, which is a schematic diagram of another implementation of the communication method provided in this application. The method includes the following steps.
S700.网络设备发送第一可见性信息,相应的,第一终端设备接收该第一可见性信息。其中,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量。S700. The network device sends first visibility information, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first visibility information. The first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between the network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device.
应理解,步骤S700为可选步骤。步骤S700的实现过程可以参考前文步骤S400及相关描述。It should be understood that step S700 is an optional step. The implementation process of step S700 can be referred to step S400 and related descriptions above.
类似地,对于第一终端设备而言,该第一终端设备可以通过其它方式获取第一可见性信息。例如,在步骤S701中,第一终端设备通过自身的信息采集模块(例如摄像头、麦克风、天线、雷达、传感器等)得到的信息确定该第一可见性信息。Similarly, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information through other means. For example, in step S701, the first terminal device determines the first visibility information through information obtained by its own information acquisition module (e.g., camera, microphone, antenna, radar, sensor, etc.).
可选的,步骤S700和步骤S701可以择一实现,即第一终端设备可以基于这两个步骤中的其中一个步骤获得第一可见性信息。Optionally, steps S700 and S701 can be implemented in one of them, that is, the first terminal device can obtain the first visibility information based on one of these two steps.
可选的,步骤S700和步骤S701都可以执行。其中,如果第一终端设备在步骤S700中接收的第一可见性信息,与第一终端设备在步骤S701中获取的第一可见性信息不一致的情况下,该第一终端设备可以任意舍弃/忽略其中一项,或者,该第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示舍弃/忽略其中一项,此处不做限定。Optionally, both steps S700 and S701 can be executed. If the first visibility information received by the first terminal device in step S700 is inconsistent with the first visibility information obtained by the first terminal device in step S701, the first terminal device may arbitrarily discard/ignore one of them, or the first terminal device may discard/ignore one of them based on the instruction of the network device; no limitation is made here.
S702.网络设备发送第一配置信息,相应的,第一终端设备接收该第一配置信息。其中,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,N为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测。S702. The network device sends first configuration information, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first configuration information. The first configuration information is used to configure L RSs, where N is a positive integer; and the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection.
S703.第一终端设备基于该第一可见性信息,在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS。S703. Based on the first visibility information, the first terminal device determines a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being the RS used for beam fault recovery.
基于图7所示方案,第一终端设备获取的第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与特定的终端设备之间的通信质量,该特定的终端设备可以包括位于第一地理区域内的任一终端设备,或,该第一终端设备自身。此后,该第一终端设备可以在步骤S703中基于第一可见性信息在该L个RS中确定第二RS。换言之,区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息可以用于确定用于波束故障恢复的RS。通过这种方式,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Based on the scheme shown in Figure 7, the first visibility information acquired by the first terminal device is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a specific terminal device. This specific terminal device may include any terminal device located within a first geographical area, or the first terminal device itself. Subsequently, in step S703, the first terminal device can determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information. In other words, visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level can be used to determine the RS for beam failure recovery. In this way, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region level or at the terminal device level (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection), which can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
类似地,如前文图5和图6所示示例,在图7所示方法中,终端设备能够基于区域粒度的可见性信息或终端设备粒度的可见性信息进行目标波束的选择/确定(即在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS),能够避免或减少由于网络设备的信号被遮挡导致波束失败恢复的频繁触发的情况出现,可以提升波束管理效率。Similarly, as illustrated in Figures 5 and 6 above, in the method shown in Figure 7, the terminal device can select/determine the target beam based on visibility information at the region granularity or visibility information at the terminal device granularity (i.e., select/determine the RS for beam failure recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection). This can avoid or reduce the frequent triggering of beam failure recovery due to signal blockage of network devices, thereby improving beam management efficiency.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图7所示方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息指示用于波束故障恢复的RS满足第一条件,该第一条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation, the method shown in Figure 7 further includes: the first terminal device receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating that the RS for beam fault recovery meets a first condition, the first condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the other RSs.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于其它RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative overpass service time of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the cumulative overpass service time of the network devices corresponding to the other RSs; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the cumulative over-the-top service duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
从而,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS(即第二RS)。Thus, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS (i.e., the second RS) for beam fault recovery from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, based on the instructions of the network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图7所示方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息指示用于波束失败恢复的RS满足第二条件,该第二条件包括以下其中一项:In one possible implementation, the method shown in Figure 7 further includes: the first terminal device receiving second indication information, the second indication information indicating that the RS used for beam failure recovery meets a second condition, the second condition including one of the following:
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备位于该第一终端设备的过顶的空间角度区域时的预期信号强度大于或等于阈值;或In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the expected signal strength of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold when the network device is located in the spatial angle region over the first terminal device; or
在用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS的信号强度大于或等于阈值。In one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection, the signal strength of the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to a threshold.
从而,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定预期信号强度较强的RS作为用于波束故障恢复的RS(即第二RS),能够提升基于该用于波束故障恢复的RS进行通信的通信质量。Therefore, the first terminal device can select/determine the RS with the stronger expected signal strength from one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection as the RS for beam fault recovery (i.e., the second RS) based on the instructions of the network device, thereby improving the communication quality of communication based on the RS used for beam fault recovery.
在一种可能的实现方式中,用于候选波束探测的L个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该方法还包括:该第一终端设备接收第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示以下至少一项:In one possible implementation, the L RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the method further includes: the first terminal device receiving third indication information, the third indication information indicating at least one of the following:
在该K组RS中,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS为同一组内的不同RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;In this group of K RSs, the RSs used for beam failure recovery and the RSs used for beam failure detection are different RSs within the same group, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold.
在该K组RS中,在与用于波束失败探测的RS位于同一组内的其它RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS与用于波束失败探测的RS分别为不同组的RS,且用于波束失败恢复的RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长大于或等于阈值;或In the K groups of RSs, if the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to other RSs in the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection is less than the threshold, then the RS used for beam failure recovery and the RS used for beam failure detection are RSs in different groups, and the serviceable duration or cumulative over-the-top serviceable duration of the network device corresponding to the RS used for beam failure recovery is greater than or equal to the threshold; or
在该K组RS中,任一RS对应的网络设备的可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长均小于阈值时,用于波束失败恢复的RS为可服务时长或过顶累计可服务时长最长的网络设备对应的RS。In the K groups of RSs, if the available service time or the cumulative available service time of the network device corresponding to any RS is less than the threshold, the RS used for beam failure recovery is the RS corresponding to the network device with the longest available service time or the longest cumulative available service time.
从而,第一终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示,优先在与用于波束失败探测的RS相同组内的用于候选波束检测的RS中选择/确定用于波束故障恢复的RS,由于同一组内的不同RS对应的不同网络设备可能是具备关联关系的,通过这种方式,使能终端设备尽量在容易建立星间链的卫星波束间进行恢复操作,减少星间交互开销。Thus, the first terminal device can, based on the instructions of the network device, prioritize selecting/determining the RS for beam failure recovery from the RS for candidate beam detection within the same group as the RS used for beam failure detection. Since different network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group may be related, this enables the terminal device to perform recovery operations between satellite beams where inter-satellite links can be easily established, thereby reducing inter-satellite interaction overhead.
可选的,该用于候选波束探测的一个或多个RS对应于K组RS,K为正整数;该K组RS满足以下任一项:Optionally, the one or more RSs used for candidate beam detection correspond to K groups of RSs, where K is a positive integer; the K groups of RSs satisfy any of the following:
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨道是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨道是不同的;Within these K groups of RSs, the network devices corresponding to different RSs within the same group have the same track, while the network devices corresponding to RSs in different groups have different tracks.
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是相同的,不同组的RS对应的网络设备的轨迹是不同的;或Within these K groups of RSs, the network device trajectories corresponding to different RSs within the same group are the same, while the network device trajectories corresponding to RSs in different groups are different; or
在该K组RS中,同一组内的不同RS对应的网络设备之间的距离小于阈值,不同组的RS对应的网络设备之间的距离大于阈值。In the K groups of RS, the distance between network devices corresponding to different RS within the same group is less than the threshold, while the distance between network devices corresponding to RS in different groups is greater than the threshold.
需要说明的是,图7所示方法涉及的术语以及各个实现方式,可以参考前文图4所示方法及其可能的实现过程。It should be noted that the terminology and implementation methods involved in the method shown in Figure 7 can be found in the method shown in Figure 4 above and its possible implementation process.
请参阅图8,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置800,该通信装置800包括收发单元802和处理单元801。Please refer to Figure 8. This application embodiment provides a communication device 800, which includes a transceiver unit 802 and a processing unit 801.
应理解,通信装置800可以实现上述方法实施例中任一通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请实施例中,该通信装置800可以是上述方法实施例中任一通信装置,也可以是上述方法实施例中任一通信装置内部的集成电路或者元件等,例如芯片。It should be understood that the communication device 800 can perform the functions of any communication device (e.g., terminal device or network device) in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiments of this application, the communication device 800 can be any communication device in the above method embodiments, or it can be an integrated circuit or component, such as a chip, inside any communication device in the above method embodiments.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置800为用于执行前述实施例中第一终端设备所执行的方法时,该处理单元801用于获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该处理单元801还用于基于该第一可见性信息,确定第一参考信号(reference signal,RS)对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长;其中,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测(beam failure detection,BFD)的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。In one possible implementation, when the device 800 is used to execute the method performed by the first terminal device in the aforementioned embodiments, the processing unit 801 is used to acquire first visibility information, which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the processing unit 801 is further used to determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置800为用于执行前述实施例中网络设备所执行的方法时,处理单元801用于确定第一配置信息;该处理单元801用于确定第一RS,该第一RS用于波束失败探测;其中,第一可见性信息用于确定该第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复;其中,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该收发单元802用于发送该第一RS。In another possible implementation, when the device 800 is used to execute the method performed by the network device in the aforementioned embodiments, the processing unit 801 is used to determine first configuration information; the processing unit 801 is used to determine a first RS, the first RS being used for beam failure detection; wherein, first visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS providing services to the first terminal device, the first RS being an RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration being used for beam recovery before beam failure; wherein, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the transceiver unit 802 is used to transmit the first RS.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置800为用于执行前述实施例中第一终端设备所执行的方法时,该处理单元801用于获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该收发单元802用于接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,L为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该处理单元801还用于基于该第一可见性信息,在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS。In another possible implementation, when the device 800 is used to execute the method performed by the first terminal device in the aforementioned embodiments, the processing unit 801 is used to acquire first visibility information, which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located in a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located in the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the transceiver unit 802 is used to receive first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the processing unit 801 is also used to determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information, wherein the second RS is an RS used for beam fault recovery.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置800为用于执行前述实施例中网络设备所执行的方法时,处理单元801用于确定第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,L为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该收发单元802用于发送该第一配置信息;其中,第一可见性信息用于在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量。In another possible implementation, when the device 800 is used to execute the method performed by the network device in the foregoing embodiments, the processing unit 801 is used to determine first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the transceiver unit 802 is used to transmit the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located in a first geographical area, the terminal device located in the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located in one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
需要说明的是,上述通信装置800的单元的信息执行过程及相应的技术效果等内容,具体可参见本申请前述所示的方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the information execution process and corresponding technical effects of the unit of the above-mentioned communication device 800 can be specifically described in the method embodiments shown above in this application, and will not be repeated here.
请参阅图9,为本申请提供的通信装置900的另一种示意性结构图,通信装置900至少包括输入输出接口901。其中,通信装置900可以为芯片或集成电路。Please refer to Figure 9, which is another schematic structural diagram of the communication device 900 provided in this application. The communication device 900 includes at least an input/output interface 901. The communication device 900 can be a chip or an integrated circuit.
可选的,该通信装置还包括逻辑电路902。Optionally, the communication device also includes logic circuitry 902.
其中,图8所示收发单元802可以为通信接口,该通信接口可以是图9中的输入输出接口901,该输入输出接口901可以包括输入接口和输出接口。或者,该通信接口也可以是收发电路,该收发电路可以包括输入接口电路和输出接口电路。In Figure 8, the transceiver unit 802 can be a communication interface, which can be the input/output interface 901 in Figure 9. The input/output interface 901 can include an input interface and an output interface. Alternatively, the communication interface can also be a transceiver circuit, which can include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
可选的,逻辑电路902用于获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该逻辑电路902还用于基于该第一可见性信息,确定第一参考信号(reference signal,RS)对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长;其中,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测(beam failure detection,BFD)的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复。Optionally, the logic circuit 902 is used to acquire first visibility information, which is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the logic circuit 902 is further used to determine, based on the first visibility information, the remaining service duration for the network device corresponding to the first reference signal (RS) to provide services to the first terminal device; wherein, the first RS is an RS used for beam failure detection (BFD), and the remaining service duration is used for beam recovery before beam failure.
可选的,逻辑电路902用于确定第一配置信息;该逻辑电路902用于确定第一RS,该第一RS用于波束失败探测;其中,第一可见性信息用于确定该第一RS对应的网络设备向该第一终端设备提供服务的剩余服务时长,该第一RS是用于波束失败探测的RS,该剩余服务时长用于波束失败前的波束恢复;其中,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该输入输出接口901用于发送该第一RS。Optionally, logic circuit 902 is used to determine first configuration information; logic circuit 902 is used to determine a first RS, the first RS being used for beam failure detection; wherein, first visibility information is used to determine the remaining service duration of the network device corresponding to the first RS providing services to the first terminal device, the first RS being an RS used for beam failure detection, and the remaining service duration being used for beam recovery before beam failure; wherein, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between network devices located within one or more spatial angle intervals and terminal devices located within a first geographical area, the terminal devices located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between network devices located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the input/output interface 901 is used to transmit the first RS.
可选的,逻辑电路902用于获取第一可见性信息,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量;该输入输出接口901用于接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,L为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该逻辑电路902还用于基于该第一可见性信息,在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS。Optionally, the logic circuit 902 is used to acquire first visibility information, which indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, wherein the terminal device located within the first geographical area includes the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information indicates the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and the first terminal device; the input/output interface 901 is used to receive first configuration information, which configures L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the logic circuit 902 is further used to determine a second RS among the L RSs based on the first visibility information, wherein the second RS is an RS used for beam fault recovery.
可选的,逻辑电路902用于确定第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置L个RS,L为正整数;其中,该L个RS用于候选波束检测;该输入输出接口901用于发送该第一配置信息;其中,第一可见性信息用于在该L个RS中确定第二RS,该第二RS是用于波束故障恢复的RS;该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与位于第一地理区域内的终端设备之间的通信质量,位于该第一地理区域内的终端设备包括该第一终端设备;或,该第一可见性信息用于指示位于一个或多个空间角度区间内的网络设备与第一终端设备之间的通信质量。Optionally, the logic circuit 902 is used to determine first configuration information, which is used to configure L RSs, where L is a positive integer; wherein the L RSs are used for candidate beam detection; the input/output interface 901 is used to send the first configuration information; wherein first visibility information is used to determine a second RS among the L RSs, the second RS being an RS used for beam fault recovery; the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a terminal device located within a first geographical area, the terminal device located within the first geographical area including the first terminal device; or, the first visibility information is used to indicate the communication quality between a network device located within one or more spatial angle intervals and a first terminal device.
其中,逻辑电路902和输入输出接口901可以执行前述方法实施例中任一通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)执行的方法并实现对应的有益效果,此处不再赘述。The logic circuit 902 and the input/output interface 901 can execute the method executed by any of the communication devices (e.g., terminal devices or network devices) in the aforementioned method embodiments and achieve the corresponding beneficial effects, which will not be elaborated here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图8所示处理单元801可以为图9中的逻辑电路902。In one possible implementation, the processing unit 801 shown in FIG8 can be the logic circuit 902 in FIG9.
可选的,逻辑电路902可以是一个处理装置,处理装置的功能可以部分或全部通过软件实现。其中,处理装置的功能可以部分或全部通过软件实现。Optionally, the logic circuit 902 can be a processing device, the functions of which can be partially or entirely implemented in software.
可选的,处理装置可以包括存储器和处理器,其中,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行任意一个方法实施例中的相应处理和/或步骤。Optionally, the processing apparatus may include a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor reads and executes the computer program stored in the memory to perform the corresponding processing and/or steps in any of the method embodiments.
可选地,处理装置可以仅包括处理器。用于存储计算机程序的存储器位于处理装置之外,处理器通过电路/电线与存储器连接,以读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序。其中,存储器和处理器可以集成在一起,或者也可以是物理上互相独立的。Optionally, the processing device may consist of only a processor. A memory for storing computer programs is located outside the processing device, and the processor is connected to the memory via circuitry/wires to read and execute the computer programs stored in the memory. The memory and processor may be integrated together or physically independent of each other.
可选地,该处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片,或一个或多个集成电路。例如,处理装置可以是一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)、中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU)、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP)、微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其它集成芯片,或者上述芯片或者处理器的任意组合等。Optionally, the processing device may be one or more chips, or one or more integrated circuits. For example, the processing device may be one or more field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), system-on-chips (SoCs), central processing units (CPUs), network processors (NPs), digital signal processors (DSPs), microcontroller units (MCUs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), or other integrated chips, or any combination of the above chips or processors.
请参阅图10,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置1000,该通信装置1000具体可以为上述实施例中的作为终端设备的通信装置。Please refer to Figure 10, which shows the communication device 1000 involved in the above embodiments provided in the embodiments of this application. Specifically, the communication device 1000 can be the communication device that serves as a terminal device in the above embodiments.
其中,该通信装置1000的一种可能的逻辑结构示意图,该通信装置1000可以包括但不限于至少一个处理器1001以及通信接口1002。The present invention provides a possible logical structure diagram of the communication device 1000, which may include, but is not limited to, at least one processor 1001 and a communication interface 1002.
进一步可选的,该装置还可以包括存储器1003、总线1004中的至少一个,在本申请的实施例中,该至少一个处理器1001用于对通信装置1000的动作进行控制处理。Further optionally, the device may also include at least one of a memory 1003 and a bus 1004. In the embodiments of this application, the at least one processor 1001 is used to control the operation of the communication device 1000.
此外,处理器1001可以是中央处理器单元,通用处理器,数字信号处理器,专用集成电路,现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。该处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合等等。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Furthermore, the processor 1001 can be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field-programmable gate array, or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application. The processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, etc. Those skilled in the art will clearly understand that, for the sake of convenience and brevity, the specific working processes of the systems, devices, and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,图10所示通信装置1000具体可以用于实现前述方法实施例中终端设备所实现的步骤,并实现终端设备对应的技术效果,图10所示通信装置的具体实现方式,均可以参考前述方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication device 1000 shown in Figure 10 can be used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal device in the aforementioned method embodiments and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the terminal device. The specific implementation of the communication device shown in Figure 10 can be referred to the description in the aforementioned method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
请参阅图11,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置的结构示意图,该通信装置具体可以为上述实施例中的网络设备,其中,该通信装置的结构可以参考图11所示的结构。Please refer to Figure 11, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device involved in the above embodiments provided in the embodiments of this application. The communication device can specifically be the network device in the above embodiments, and the structure of the communication device can be referred to the structure shown in Figure 11.
通信装置包括至少一个处理器1111以及至少一个网络接口1114。The communication device includes at least one processor 1111 and at least one network interface 1114.
可选的,该通信装置还包括至少一个存储器1112、至少一个收发器1113和一个或多个天线1115。处理器1111、存储器1112、收发器1113和网络接口1114相连,例如通过总线相连,在本申请实施例中,该连接可包括各类接口、传输线或总线等,本实施例对此不做限定。天线1115与收发器1113相连。网络接口1114用于使得通信装置通过通信链路,与其它通信设备通信。例如网络接口1114可以包括通信装置与核心网设备之间的网络接口,例如S1接口,网络接口可以包括通信装置和其他通信装置(例如其他网络设备或者核心网设备)之间的网络接口,例如X2或者Xn接口。Optionally, the communication device further includes at least one memory 1112, at least one transceiver 1113, and one or more antennas 1115. The processor 1111, memory 1112, transceiver 1113, and network interface 1114 are connected, for example, via a bus. In this embodiment, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines, or buses, etc., and this embodiment is not limited thereto. The antenna 1115 is connected to the transceiver 1113. The network interface 1114 is used to enable the communication device to communicate with other communication devices through a communication link. For example, the network interface 1114 may include a network interface between the communication device and core network equipment, such as an S1 interface. The network interface may also include a network interface between the communication device and other communication devices (e.g., other network devices or core network equipment), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
处理器1111主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持通信装置执行实施例中所描述的动作。通信装置可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图11中的处理器1111可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。该基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。该中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储器中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。The processor 1111 is primarily used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data from the software programs, for example, to support the actions described in the embodiments of the communication device. The communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit (CPU). The baseband processor is primarily used to process communication protocols and communication data, while the CPU is primarily used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data from the software programs. The processor 1111 in Figure 11 can integrate the functions of both a baseband processor and a CPU. Those skilled in the art will understand that the baseband processor and CPU can also be independent processors interconnected via technologies such as buses. Those skilled in the art will understand that a terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, and multiple CPUs to enhance its processing capabilities. Various components of the terminal device can be connected via various buses. The baseband processor can also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The CPU can also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing communication protocols and communication data can be built into the processor or stored in memory as a software program, which is then executed by the processor to implement the baseband processing function.
存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1112可以是独立存在,与处理器1111相连。可选的,存储器1112可以和处理器1111集成在一起,例如集成在一个芯片之内。其中,存储器1112能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码,并由处理器1111来控制执行,被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1111的驱动程序。The memory is primarily used to store software programs and data. The memory 1112 can exist independently or be connected to the processor 1111. Optionally, the memory 1112 can be integrated with the processor 1111, for example, integrated into a single chip. The memory 1112 can store program code that executes the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application, and its execution is controlled by the processor 1111. The various types of computer program code being executed can also be considered as drivers for the processor 1111.
图11仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以为与处理器处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件,或者为独立的存储元件,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Figure 11 shows only one memory and one processor. In actual terminal devices, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories. Memory can also be called storage medium or storage device, etc. Memory can be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, i.e., an on-chip storage element, or it can be a separate storage element; this application does not limit this.
收发器1113可以用于支持通信装置与终端之间射频信号的接收或者发送,收发器1113可以与天线1115相连。收发器1113包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地,一个或多个天线1115可以接收射频信号,该收发器1113的接收机Rx用于从天线接收该射频信号,并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给该处理器1111,以便处理器1111对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理,例如解调处理和译码处理。此外,收发器1113中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1111接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号,并通过一个或多个天线1115发送该射频信号。具体地,接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号,该下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号,该上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。Transceiver 1113 can be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between a communication device and a terminal. Transceiver 1113 can be connected to antenna 1115. Transceiver 1113 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, one or more antennas 1115 can receive radio frequency signals. The receiver Rx of transceiver 1113 is used to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and provide the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals to processor 1111 so that processor 1111 can perform further processing on the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, such as demodulation and decoding. In addition, the transmitter Tx in transceiver 1113 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals from processor 1111, convert the modulated digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals into radio frequency signals, and transmit the radio frequency signals through one or more antennas 1115. Specifically, the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of downmixing and analog-to-digital conversion on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency (IF) signal. The order of these downmixing and IF conversion processes is adjustable. The transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of upmixing and digital-to-analog conversion on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital IF signal to obtain a radio frequency signal. The order of these upmixing and IF conversion processes is also adjustable. The digital baseband signal and the digital IF signal can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
收发器1113也可以称为接口单元、收发单元、收发机、收发装置、接口模块等。可选的,可以将接口单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将接口单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即接口单元包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。The transceiver 1113 can also be called an interface unit, transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver device, interface module, etc. Optionally, the device in the interface unit that implements the receiving function can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device in the interface unit that implements the transmitting function can be regarded as the transmitting unit. That is, the interface unit includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. The receiving unit can also be called a receiver, input port, receiving circuit, etc., and the transmitting unit can be called a transmitter, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
需要说明的是,图11所示通信装置具体可以用于实现前述方法实施例中网络设备所实现的步骤,并实现网络设备对应的技术效果,图11所示通信装置的具体实现方式,均可以参考前述的各个方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication device shown in Figure 11 can be used to implement the steps implemented by the network device in the aforementioned method embodiments and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the network device. The specific implementation of the communication device shown in Figure 11 can be referred to the descriptions in the aforementioned method embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质用于存储一个或多个计算机执行指令,当计算机执行指令被计算机执行时,该处理器执行如前述方法实施例中任一通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)可能的实现方式所述的方法。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a computer, the processor performs the method as described in any possible implementation of a communication device (e.g., a terminal device or a network device) in the foregoing method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),包括指令,当计算机程序产品中的指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述方法实施例中任一通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)可能实现方式的方法。This application also provides a computer program product (or computer program) including instructions. When the instructions in the computer program product are executed by a processor, the processor performs a method that may be implemented by any of the communication devices (e.g., terminal devices or network devices) described in the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于实现上述方法实施例中任一通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。This application also provides a chip system including at least one processor for implementing the functions involved in any possible implementation of the communication device (e.g., terminal device or network device) in the above method embodiments.
可选的,所述芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。在一种可能的设计中,该芯片系统还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该终端设备必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。Optionally, the chip system further includes interface circuitry that provides program instructions and/or data to the at least one processor. In one possible design, the chip system may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the terminal device. The chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.
在一种可能的设计中,芯片系统还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该上述方法实施例中任一通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In one possible design, the chip system may further include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for any of the communication devices described in the above method embodiments. The chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,该网络系统架构包括上述任一实施例中的终端设备和网络设备。This application also provides a communication system, the network system architecture of which includes the terminal device and network device in any of the above embodiments.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, apparatuses, and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are illustrative; for instance, the division of units is a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed. Furthermore, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection between apparatuses or units through some interfaces, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate. The components shown as units may or may not be physical units; that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理模块中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。Furthermore, the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into a processing module, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The integrated units can be implemented in hardware or as software functional units. If the integrated unit is implemented as a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the essential contribution of the technical solution of this application, or all or part of the technical solution, can be embodied in the form of a software product. This computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of this application. The aforementioned storage medium includes various media capable of storing program code, such as USB flash drives, portable hard drives, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks, or optical disks.
以上所述,仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above description is merely a specific implementation of the embodiments of this application, but the protection scope of the embodiments of this application is not limited thereto. Any variations or substitutions that can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art within the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of this application should be included within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the embodiments of this application should be determined by the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (28)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410645193.X | 2024-05-22 | ||
| CN202410645193.XA CN121013089A (en) | 2024-05-22 | 2024-05-22 | Communication method and related device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025241978A1 true WO2025241978A1 (en) | 2025-11-27 |
Family
ID=97724330
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/095061 Pending WO2025241978A1 (en) | 2024-05-22 | 2025-05-15 | Communication method and related apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN121013089A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025241978A1 (en) |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2019134089A1 (en) * | 2018-01-04 | 2019-07-11 | 富士通株式会社 | Configuration method and device for beam failure recovery, and communication system |
| CN111034338A (en) * | 2017-06-23 | 2020-04-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Unified RLF detection, multi-beam RLM in NR and full diversity BFR mechanism |
| CN116723519A (en) * | 2022-02-28 | 2023-09-08 | 华为技术有限公司 | Beam failure recovery method, device and system |
| WO2024002648A1 (en) * | 2022-06-29 | 2024-01-04 | Sony Group Corporation | Methods, communications devices, and non-terrestrial infrastructure equipment |
-
2024
- 2024-05-22 CN CN202410645193.XA patent/CN121013089A/en active Pending
-
2025
- 2025-05-15 WO PCT/CN2025/095061 patent/WO2025241978A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN111034338A (en) * | 2017-06-23 | 2020-04-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Unified RLF detection, multi-beam RLM in NR and full diversity BFR mechanism |
| WO2019134089A1 (en) * | 2018-01-04 | 2019-07-11 | 富士通株式会社 | Configuration method and device for beam failure recovery, and communication system |
| CN116723519A (en) * | 2022-02-28 | 2023-09-08 | 华为技术有限公司 | Beam failure recovery method, device and system |
| WO2024002648A1 (en) * | 2022-06-29 | 2024-01-04 | Sony Group Corporation | Methods, communications devices, and non-terrestrial infrastructure equipment |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN121013089A (en) | 2025-11-25 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| EP4307767A1 (en) | Wireless communication method, apparatus and system | |
| CN116033502B (en) | Methods and devices for wireless communications | |
| CN115996402B (en) | Method and apparatus for wireless communication | |
| CN115604812A (en) | Positioning method, device and system | |
| WO2024216445A1 (en) | Positioning method, terminal device, and network device | |
| CN117957872A (en) | Communication method, terminal device and network device | |
| WO2025241978A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025223243A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025223273A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| US20250126590A1 (en) | Apparatus, methods, for apparatus and computer program products for location function including non-terestrial access point | |
| WO2025223238A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025247092A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| CN116326132B (en) | Wireless communication method and device | |
| WO2025232686A1 (en) | Positioning method and apparatus | |
| WO2025200960A9 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025252136A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025167425A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2024125370A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025054864A1 (en) | Communication method, device, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| WO2025054751A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
| WO2025059995A1 (en) | Communication method, and apparatus | |
| WO2025081476A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025119100A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025067223A1 (en) | Satellite communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025065652A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus |